礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
《相应部》· 《蕴品》的义注巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Saṃyuttanikāye · Khandhavagga-aṭṭhakathā
1. 蕴相应义注
400 段
那库拉比达品巴利
1. Nakulapituvaggo
《那拘罗父经》的注释巴利
1. Nakulapitusuttavaṇṇanā
1 在《蕴品》第一经里,“在跋耆”指的是一个叫跋耆的地方。“在鳄鱼山”指的是鳄鱼山城。据说当年建这座城的时候,有鳄鱼叫了一声,人们就给它取名叫“鳄鱼山”。“在怖畏迦罗林”指的是:因为一位叫怖畏迦罗的女夜叉住在那里,这片林子就得了这个名字;又因为这片林子被施给鹿群,让它们在那里安稳无忧,所以也叫“鹿野苑”。世尊就住在那个地方,依靠那座城,住在那片树林里。“那拘罗父”是指一个叫那拘罗的小孩的父亲。巴利
1.Khandhiyavaggassa paṭhame bhaggesūti evaṃnāmake janapade. Susumāragireti susumāragiranagare. Tasmiṃ kira māpiyamāne susumāro saddamakāsi, tenassa ‘‘susumāragira’’ntveva nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Bhesakaḷāvaneti bhesakaḷāya nāma yakkhiniyā adhivutthattā evaṃladdhanāme vane. Tadeva migagaṇassa abhayatthāya dinnattā migadāyoti vuccati. Bhagavā tasmiṃ janapade taṃ nagaraṃ nissāya tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe viharati. Nakulapitāti nakulassa nāma dārakassa pitā.
老了,就是指被衰老侵蚀。年迈,就是指年纪大了。长老,就是指从出生算起已经活了很久。已走过时光,就是指已经经历了过去、现在、未来三个阶段。到达晚年,就是指在这三个阶段中,已经到了最后一个阶段。身体有病,就是指身体患病。这个身体就算是金色的,也因为一直流漏不止,所以本质上就是有病。具体来说,这个身体有三种病:老衰病、疾病、死亡病。其中,这位长老虽然因为年老而有老衰病,但这里主要指的是他因为频繁生病而有的疾病。屡屡生病,就是指经常生病,病没有间断。难得一见,就是指因为这种病态,他没法在想见的时候就来,只能偶尔见到,不能一直见到。令人心生欢喜的,就是指能让心增长的人。见到这些人时,因为善法,心会增长,像舍利弗、目犍连等大长老,就叫令人心生欢喜的人。请教导,就是指一次又一次地教。前面说的话叫教诫,后面反复说的叫教诲。或者,针对已经发生的事而说,叫教诫;针对还没发生的事,依据经典或传统而说,叫教诲。另外,教诫也好,教诲也好,意思其实是一样的,只是说法不同而已。巴利
Jiṇṇoti jarājiṇṇo. Vuḍḍhoti vayovuḍḍho. Mahallakoti jātimahallako. Addhagatoti tiyaddhagato. Vayoanuppattoti tesu tīsu addhesu pacchimavayaṃ anuppatto. Āturakāyoti gilānakāyo. Idañhi sarīraṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇampi niccapaggharaṇaṭṭhena āturaṃyeva nāma . Visesena panassa jarāturatā byādhāturatā maraṇāturatāti tisso āturatā honti. Tāsu kiñcāpi eso mahallakattā jarāturova, abhiṇharogatāya panassa byādhāturatā idha adhippetā. Abhikkhaṇātaṅkoti abhiṇharogo nirantararogo. Aniccadassāvīti tāya āturatāya icchiticchitakkhaṇe āgantuṃ asakkonto kadācideva daṭṭhuṃ labhāmi, na sabbakālanti attho. Manobhāvanīyānanti manavaḍḍhakānaṃ . Yesu hi diṭṭhesu kusalavasena cittaṃ vaḍḍhati, te sāriputtamoggallānādayo mahātherā manobhāvanīyā nāma. Anusāsatūti punappunaṃ sāsatu. Purimañhi vacanaṃ ovādo nāma, aparāparaṃ anusāsanī nāma. Otiṇṇe vā vatthusmiṃ vacanaṃ ovādo nāma, anotiṇṇe tantivasena vā paveṇivasena vā vuttaṃ anusāsanī nāma. Apica ovādoti vā anusāsanīti vā atthato ekameva, byañjanamattameva nānaṃ.
这个身体确实是病,因为它一直在流漏,所以即使肤色像金子一样,或者像罂粟籽那么好看,它也还是病。说它“像蛋一样”,是说它像蛋一样脆弱无力。就像拿鸡蛋、孔雀蛋或者球来扔、来打,根本没法拿来玩,一碰就碎;这个身体也是这样,在荆棘或树桩上绊一下就会破,所以说它“像蛋一样”。说它“被包裹着”,是被一层薄薄的皮肤包裹着。蛋有坚韧的膜包着,所以牛虻、蚊子之类叮下去,也没法咬破壳让里面的液体流出来。可是在这个身体上,它们咬破皮肤后,想干什么就干什么。就是这样被一层薄薄的皮肤包裹着。说“除了无知还能是什么”,意思是除了无知的状态之外,还能有什么呢?他就是个无知的人,这就是这句话的意思。说“因此”,是因为这个身体就是这个样子,所以……巴利
Āturo hāyanti āturo hi ayaṃ, suvaṇṇavaṇṇo piyaṅgusāmopi samāno niccapaggharaṇaṭṭhena āturoyeva. Aṇḍabhūtoti aṇḍaṃ viya bhūto dubbalo. Yathā kukkuṭaṇḍaṃ vā mayūraṇḍaṃ vā geṇḍukaṃ viya gahetvā khipantena vā paharantena vā na sakkā kīḷituṃ, tāvadeva bhijjati, evamayampi kāyo kaṇṭakepi khāṇukepi pakkhalitassa bhijjatīti aṇḍaṃ viya bhūtoti aṇḍabhūto. Pariyonaddhoti sukhumena chavimattena pariyonaddho. Aṇḍañhi sāratacena pariyonaddhaṃ, tena ḍaṃsamakasādayo nilīyitvāpi chaviṃ chinditvā yūsaṃ paggharāpetuṃ na sakkonti. Imasmiṃ pana chaviṃ chinditvā yaṃ icchanti, taṃ karonti. Evaṃ sukhumāya chaviyā pariyonaddho. Kimaññatra bālyāti bālabhāvato aññaṃ kimatthi? Bāloyeva ayanti attho. Tasmāti yasmā ayaṃ kāyo evarūpo, tasmā.
“于是前往”是说:就像国王的侍从,先去侍奉转轮王,接着又去侍奉辅相大臣一样;这位比丘先去亲近正法转轮王世尊,接着想向法将表达敬意,就前往具寿舍利弗那里。“极清净”是指非常清净。“诸根”是指以意为第六的六根。“清净”是指没有过失。“洁白”是它的同义词。说它“洁白”,正是因为远离随烦恼的染污,并不是指颜色洁白。正是看到这种洁白,才了解他的诸根清净。据说,这位长老具有这样的理趣智。巴利
Tenupasaṅkamīti rañño cakkavattissa upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā anantaraṃ pariṇāyakaratanassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanto rājapuriso viya, saddhammacakkavattissa bhagavato upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā, anantaraṃ dhammasenāpatissa apacitiṃ kātukāmo yenāyasmā sāriputto, tenupasaṅkami. Vippasannānīti suṭṭhu pasannāni. Indriyānīti manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni. Parisuddhoti niddoso. Pariyodātoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Nirupakkilesatāyeva hi esa pariyodātoti vutto, na setabhāvena. Etassa ca pariyodātataṃ disvāva indriyānaṃ vippasannataṃ aññāsi. Nayaggāhapaññā kiresā therassa.
“怎么会没有呢?”意思是:会因为什么原因而得不到呢?含义是:其实已经得到了。这句话要说明什么?说明的是对大师怀有信赖之情。据说,这位居士从见到大师的时候起,就对大师生起了如父般的爱;而那位女居士则对大师生起了如母般的爱。两个人都称大师为“我的儿子”。这是因为他们之间的亲情是跨越生生世世延续下来的。据说,那位女居士在五百生中做过如来的母亲,而那位居士则做过父亲。又有五百生中,女居士做的是大妈,居士做的是大伯;同样还有做婶母、做叔父的时候。就这样,大师在他们手里经历了一千五百个生命而长大。正因如此,那些既不能对儿子说、也不能对父亲说的话,他们坐在大师面前却能说出来。也正是因为这个原因,世尊说:“比丘们,在我的在家弟子中,最具信赖之心的,就是那拘罗父居士和那拘罗母女居士。”把他们安立在这个最高的位置上。所以,当他表明这种信赖之情时,就说了“怎么会没有呢”。“以甘露灌顶”这一句:在这里,不应该把任何禅那、观智、道或果看作“甘露灌顶”,而应该把甜美的说法本身理解为“甘露灌顶”。“从远处”是指从别的国家、别的地区。巴利
Kathañhi no siyāti kena kāraṇena na laddhā bhavissati? Laddhāyevāti attho. Iminā kiṃ dīpeti? Satthuvissāsikabhāvaṃ. Ayaṃ kira satthu diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya pitipemaṃ, upāsikā cassa mātipemaṃ paṭilabhati. Ubhopi ‘‘mama putto’’ti satthāraṃ vadanti. Bhavantaragato hi nesaṃ sineho. Sā kira upāsikā pañca jātisatāni tathāgatassa mātāva, so ca, gahapati, pitāva ahosi. Puna pañca jātisatāni upāsikā mahāmātā, upāsako mahāpitā, tathā cūḷāmātā cūḷapitāti. Evaṃ satthā diyaḍḍhaattabhāvasahassaṃ tesaṃyeva hatthe vaḍḍhito. Teneva te yaṃ neva puttassa, na pitu santike kathetuṃ sakkā, taṃ satthu santike nisinnā kathenti. Imināyeva ca kāraṇena bhagavā ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ upāsakānaṃ vissāsikānaṃ yadidaṃ nakulapitā gahapati, yadidaṃ nakulamātā gahapatānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.257) te etadagge ṭhapesi. Iti so imaṃ vissāsikabhāvaṃ pakāsento kathañhi no siyāti āha. Amatena abhisittoti nassidha aññaṃ kiñci jhānaṃ vā vipassanā vā maggo vā phalaṃ vā ‘‘amatābhiseko’’ti daṭṭhabbo, madhuradhammadesanāyeva pana ‘‘amatābhiseko’’ti veditabbo. Dūratopīti tiroraṭṭhāpi tirojanapadāpi.
“无闻凡夫”这个词,前面已经解释过了。在“不见圣者”等说法里,“圣者”是指:因为彻底远离了烦恼,不走向邪道,只走向正道,并且应当受到包括天界在内的世间供养,所以佛陀、独觉佛和佛陀的弟子们都称为圣者。或者,这里“圣者”就是专指佛陀。正如经中所说:“比丘们,在包括天界的世间中……如来被称为圣者。”至于“善士”这个词,这里应当理解为独觉佛和如来的弟子。因为他们具备出世间的功德,是品行美好的人,所以叫善士。或者也可以说,这些称呼两种含义都适用,因为佛陀既是圣者也是善士,独觉佛和佛陀的弟子也一样既是圣者也是善士。正如所说:巴利
Assutavā puthujjanoti idaṃ vuttatthameva. Ariyānaṃ adassāvītiādīsu ariyāti ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena araṇīyato buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca vuccanti. Buddhā eva vā idha ariyā. Yathāha – ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… tathāgato ariyo’’ti vuccatīti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098). Sappurisānanti ettha pana paccekabuddhā tathāgatasāvakā ca sappurisāti veditabbā. Te hi lokuttaraguṇayogena sobhanā purisāti sappurisā. Sabbeva vā ete dvedhāpi vuttā. Buddhāpi hi ariyā ca sappurisā ca, paccekabuddhā buddhasāvakāpi. Yathāha –
凡是真正知恩、懂得报恩的智者,
他既有善友,也具备坚定的忠诚。
对受苦的人,他认真去做该做的事,
他们称这样的人为善士。巴利
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hoti; Dukhitassa sakkacca karoti kiccaṃ, Tathāvidhaṃ sappurisaṃ vadantī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
拥有善友并且忠诚牢固,仅凭这一点,就可以说他是佛陀的弟子;而知恩等品质,则是就独觉佛和佛陀而言的。现在,如果有人惯于不见那些圣者,见了也不表示赞同,就应当知道他是“不见圣者”的人。这又有两种:以眼不见圣者,以智不见圣者。其中,这里指的是以智不见的人。因为,即使以肉眼或天眼看见了圣者,对他们来说也等于没看见,因为那些眼只取色相,并不以圣者的境界为所缘。狗和豺狼之类也能用眼睛看到圣者,但不能说它们就是“见圣者”的人。巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti ettāvatā hi buddhasāvako vutto, kataññutādīhi paccekabuddhabuddhāti. Idāni yo tesaṃ ariyānaṃ adassanasīlo, na ca dassane sādhukārī, so ‘‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti veditabbo. So ca cakkhunā adassāvī, ñāṇena adassāvīti duvidho. Tesu ñāṇena adassāvī idha adhippeto. Maṃsacakkhunā hi dibbacakkhunā vā ariyā diṭṭhāpi adiṭṭhāva honti tesaṃ cakkhūnaṃ vaṇṇamattaggahaṇato na ariyabhāvagocarato. Soṇasiṅgālādayopi cakkhunā ariye passanti, na cete ariyānaṃ dassāvino nāma.
关于这件事,有一个故事:据说,住在质多罗山的一位年老才出家的侍者,服侍一位漏尽长老。有一天,他跟着长老一起去托钵,接过长老的钵和袈裟,跟在后面走回来,就问长老:“尊者,所谓的圣者,到底是什么样的呢?”长老回答说:“比如这里有个老人,拿着圣者的钵和袈裟,该做的都做了,也一直跟在圣者身边,却根本不认识圣者。贤友,圣者就是这么难以认出来啊。”虽然长老这样说了,他还是没弄明白。所以,用眼睛看到并不算真正的看见,只有用智慧看见才是看见。就像经里说的:“婆迦梨,你看见这具臭烂的身体有什么用?婆迦梨,看见法的人,就是看见我;看见我的人,就是看见法。”因此,即使能用眼睛看到,如果没有用智慧看清圣者们所见的无常等特征,没有证得圣者们所证得的法,因为没看见那些使人成为圣者的法和圣者的本质,就该知道这个人“没见过圣者”。巴利
Tatridaṃ vatthu – cittalapabbatavāsino kira khīṇāsavattherassa upaṭṭhāko vuḍḍhapabbajito ekadivasaṃ therena saddhiṃ piṇḍāya caritvā, therassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā, piṭṭhito āgacchanto theraṃ pucchi – ‘‘ariyā nāma, bhante, kīdisā’’ti? Thero āha – ‘‘idhekacco mahallako ariyānaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vattapaṭivattaṃ katvā sahacarantopi neva ariye jānāti, evaṃ dujjānāvuso, ariyā’’ti. Evaṃ vuttepi so neva aññāsi. Tasmā na cakkhunā dassanaṃ dassanaṃ, ñāṇena dassanameva dassanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena? Yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passati. Yo maṃ passati, so dhammaṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87). Tasmā cakkhunā passantopi ñāṇena ariyehi diṭṭhaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ apassanto, ariyādhigatañca dhammaṃ anadhigacchanto ariyakaradhammānaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca adiṭṭhattā ‘‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti veditabbo.
对圣法不熟练,意思是在念处等各种圣法上不擅长。对圣法未受调伏,在这里则是说:巴利
Ariyadhammassa akovidoti, satipaṭṭhānādibhede ariyadhamme akusalo. Ariyadhamme avinītoti ettha pana –
律有两种,其中每一种各有五种。
由于彼之不存在,所以这个被称为“未调伏者”。巴利
‘‘Duvidho vinayo nāma, ekamekettha pañcadhā; Abhāvato tassa ayaṃ, avinītoti vuccati’’.
这个律可以分为两种:防护律和断除律。在这两种律当中,每一种律又分成五种。防护律有五种:戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。断除律也有五种:彼分断、镇伏断、正断断、止息断、出离断。巴利
Ayañhi saṃvaravinayo pahānavinayoti duvidho vinayo. Ettha ca duvidhepi vinaye ekameko vinayo pañcadhā bhijjati. Saṃvaravinayopi hi sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Pahānavinayopi tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidho.
其中,以此巴帝摩卡防护而具足、完全具足,这就是戒防护。守护眼根,在眼根上做到防护,这就是念防护。巴利
Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ sīlasaṃvaro. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti ayaṃ (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) satisaṃvaro.
阿耆多啊——世尊说道:世间有哪些烦恼之流。
正念能挡住它们。
我说,守护诸流。
这些是靠智慧关闭的。巴利
‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, Paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa.4) –
这是智的防护。“能忍受寒冷和炎热”,这是忍耐的防护。“不随顺已生起的欲寻”,这是精进的防护。而这一切防护,因为各自防护、调伏应当防护和调伏的身恶行等,所以从防护的作用来说称为“防护”,从调伏的作用来说称为“律”。应当知道,这防护律首先分为五种。巴利
Ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.24; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ khantisaṃvaro. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ vīriyasaṃvaro. Sabbopi cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato ‘‘saṃvaro’’ vinayanato ‘‘vinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ tāva saṃvaravinayo pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
同样地,在名色分别等观智中,因为与各自的对立面直接相对,就像灯光驱散黑暗一样,以每一种观智断除每一种无益之法。具体来说:以名色确定断除有身见;以把握缘断除无因见和不平等因见;以那同一缘把握的后续部分——度疑,断除疑惑犹豫的状态;以对聚的思择断除“我、我所”的执取;以确定道与非道断除在非道上生起道的想;以观察生起断除断见;以观察灭去断除常见;以观察怖畏断除在可怖畏处视为无怖畏的想;以观察过患断除味著想;以厌离随观断除乐著想;以欲解脱智断除不欲解脱的状态;以舍智断除不舍;以随顺智断除对法住与涅槃的违逆;以种姓智断除执取行相。这叫做“彼分断”。巴利
Tathā yaṃ nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu vipassanāñāṇesu paṭipakkhabhāvato dīpālokeneva tamassa, tena tena vipassanāñāṇena tassa tassa anatthassa pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanāya abhiratisaññāya , muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukāmatāya. Upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ nibbāne ca paṭilomabhāvassa, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittagāhassa pahānaṃ, etaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ nāma.
通过近行定和安止定这两种定,能够阻止烦恼现行和增长,就像用棍子打水面上的青苔一样,从而断除那些盖等法,这叫作“镇伏断”。因为修习了四种圣道,对于每一位成就圣道的人来说,在他自己的心相续中,按照“为了断除诸见”等经文所说(《法集》277;《分别论》628),以属于集谛一方的烦恼群体永远不再生起的方式断除,这叫作“正断断”。而在果位的那一刹那,烦恼已经止息,这叫作“止息断”。巴利
Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattibhāvanivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa, tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā nayena (dha. sa. 277; vibha. 628) vuttassa samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nāma.
从一切有为法中脱离出来的、断尽一切有为法的涅槃,这叫作“出离断”。而这一切断除,因为具有舍弃的含义所以是断除,因为具有调伏的含义所以是律,因此被称为“断除律”。又因为具有如此这般的断除,或因为如此这般的律得以生起,所以这也被称为“断除律”。应当知道,这断除律也同样分为五种。巴利
Yaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ, etaṃ nissaraṇappahānaṃ nāma. Sabbampi cetaṃ pahānaṃ yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ, vinayaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Taṃtaṃpahānavato vā tassa tassa vinayassa sambhavatopetaṃ ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ pahānavinayopi pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
这样,从略说来看,律有两种;从分别来看,律有十种。因为对无闻凡夫来说,由于毁坏了防护,又未能断除应当断除的烦恼,所以这种律并不存在。由于不存在,所以就说他是“未调伏者”。同样的道理,也适用于“未见善士、不通达善士法、未在善士法中调伏”这些说法。因为这在意义上并没有差别。正如所说——巴利
Evamayaṃ saṅkhepato duvidho, bhedato ca dasavidho vinayo bhinnasaṃvarattā pahātabbassa ca appahīnattā yasmā etassa assutavato puthujjanassa natthi, tasmā abhāvato tassa ayaṃ ‘‘avinīto’’ti vuccatīti. Esa nayo sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinītoti etthāpi. Ninnānākaraṇañhi etaṃ atthato. Yathāha –
凡是那些圣者,就是那些善士;凡是那些善士,就是那些圣者。凡是那圣者之法,就是那善士之法;凡是那善士之法,就是那圣者之法。凡是那圣者之调伏,就是那善士之调伏;凡是那善士之调伏,就是那圣者之调伏。无论说“圣者”还是“善士”,说“圣法”还是“善士法”,说“圣调伏”还是“善士调伏”,这些都是一、一义、同义、同等、同分、同类的,完全就是同一个。巴利
‘‘Yeva te ariyā, teva te sappurisā. Yeva te sappurisā, teva te ariyā. Yo eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo, so eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo. Yo eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo, so eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo. Yeva te ariyavinayā, teva te sappurisavinayā. Yeva te sappurisavinayā , teva te ariyavinayā. Ariyeti vā sappuriseti vā, ariyadhammeti vā sappurisadhammeti vā, ariyavinayeti vā sappurisavinayeti vā esese eke ekaṭṭhe same samabhāge tajjāte taññevā’’ti.
有人把色看作我,具体来说,就是认为“这个色就是我,我就是这个色”,把色和我看成没有区别的一体。就像一盏燃烧的油灯,火焰就是光色,光色就是火焰,把火焰和光色看成没有区别的一体;同样地,有人把色看作我……(中略)……看成没有区别的一体。他就是以这种见解,把色看成我。
或者认为我拥有色:他先执取无色(受想行识)为我,然后像树有影子一样,把那个我看成拥有色。
或者认为我中有色:他先执取无色为我,然后像花中有香气一样,把色看成在我之中。
或者认为色中有我:他先执取无色为我,然后像盒子中有宝珠一样,把我看成在色之中。
住著而存续:意思是以烦恼现起、以压服的方式而安住。也就是说,由于“我是色、色是我的”这样的渴爱和邪见,把它吞进去、牢牢抓住,成为执取者,这就叫住著而存续。他的那个色:就是他那被这样执取的色。受等其余诸蕴也是同样的道理。巴利
Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, ‘‘yaṃ rūpaṃ, so ahaṃ , yo ahaṃ, taṃ rūpa’’nti rūpañca attañca advayaṃ samanupassati. Seyyathāpi nāma telappadīpassa jhāyato yā acci, so vaṇṇo. Yo vaṇṇo, sā accīti acciñca vaṇṇañca advayaṃ samanupassati, evameva idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati…pe… advayaṃ samanupassatīti evaṃ rūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti diṭṭhipassanāya passati. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānanti arūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā chāyāvantaṃ rukkhaṃ viya taṃ rūpavantaṃ samanupassati. Attani vā rūpanti arūpameva ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā pupphasmiṃ gandhaṃ viya attani rūpaṃ samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃ vā attānanti arūpameva ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā karaṇḍake maṇiṃ viya taṃ attānaṃ rūpasmiṃ samanupassati. Pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyīti pariyuṭṭhānākārena abhibhavanākārena ṭhito, ‘‘ahaṃ rūpaṃ, mama rūpa’’nti evaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhīhi gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gaṇhanako nāma hotīti attho. Tassa taṃ rūpanti tassa taṃ evaṃ gahitaṃ rūpaṃ. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,“把色看作我”,说的是纯粹以色为我。“或者把拥有色的我,或者我中有色,或者色中有我,把受看作我……乃至想……诸行……把识看作我”,在这七种情况里,说的是以无色为我。“或者把拥有受的我,或者我中有受,或者受中有我”,这样在四蕴中,每一蕴各有三种,于是在十二种情况里,说的是色与非色混合的我。其中,“把色看作我,把受……想……诸行……把识看作我”,这五种情况说的是断灭见,其余各处说的是常见。这样,这里就有十五种有见、五种无有见。应当知道,所有这些都障碍道,但不障碍生天,是初道所断除的。巴利
Tattha ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti suddharūpameva attāti kathitaṃ. ‘‘Rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ, vedanaṃ attato…pe… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti imesu sattasu ṭhānesu arūpaṃ attāti kathitaṃ. ‘‘Vedanāvantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā vedanaṃ, vedanāya vā attāna’’nti evaṃ catūsu khandhesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena dvādasasu ṭhānesu rūpārūpamissako attā kathito. Tattha ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu ucchedadiṭṭhi kathitā, avasesesu sassatadiṭṭhīti evamettha pannarasa bhavadiṭṭhiyo pañca vibhavadiṭṭhiyo honti, tā sabbāpi maggāvaraṇā, na saggāvaraṇā, paṭhamamaggavajjhāti veditabbā.
居士,就是这样:身是病,心也是病。这里说的“身”,即使是诸佛的身,也仍然是病。而心,如果被贪、嗔、痴所伴随,才叫作病,这里所显示的就是这个意思。至于“不是病心”,这里是通过心没有烦恼染污,来显示心的无病状态。因此,在这部经里,显示了世间的凡夫大众既有病身也有病心;诸漏尽者有病身,但没有病心;七种有学则不能说是有病心,也不能说是无病心。不过,他们正在趋向的,正是无病心的状态。第一。巴利
Evaṃkho, gahapati, āturakāyo ceva hoti āturacitto cāti kāyo nāma buddhānampi āturoyeva. Cittaṃ pana rāgadosamohānugataṃ āturaṃ nāma, taṃ idha dassitaṃ. No ca āturacittoti idha nikkilesatāya cittassa anāturabhāvo dassito. Iti imasmiṃ sutte lokiyamahājano āturakāyo ceva āturacitto cāti dassito, khīṇāsavā āturakāyā anāturacittā, satta sekhā neva āturacittā, na anāturacittāti veditabbā. Bhajamānā pana anāturacittataṃyeva bhajantīti. Paṭhamaṃ.
第二 天臂经的注释巴利
2. Devadahasuttavaṇṇanā
2 其次说到“天臂”:诸天被称为“天”,即诸王,他们的吉祥湖,或者是自然形成的湖,因此被称为“天臂”。那个湖附近有一座城镇,也以中性词形被称为“天臂”。“欲往后地”是指想要前往后方、位于偏远方向的地区。“住处”是指三个月的雨安居。“已告假”是指已经请过假;“请告假”是指请你们去请假。为什么世尊要让那些比丘去向长老请假呢?因为他想让他们成为有责任感的人。如果有人虽然住在同一座寺院里,却不去亲近大众,离开时也不告而别,这种人就叫没有责任感的人。如果有人住在同一座寺院里,会来见大众,离开时会请假,这种人就叫有责任感的人。对于这些比丘,世尊心想“这样他们就会在戒等方面不断增长”,想让他们成为有责任感的人,所以让他们去请假。巴利
2. Dutiye devadahanti devā vuccanti rājāno, tesaṃ maṅgaladaho, sayaṃjāto vā so dahoti, tasmā ‘‘devadaho’’ti vutto. Tassa avidūre nigamo devadahantveva napuṃsakaliṅgavasena saṅkhaṃ gato. Pacchābhūmagamikāti pacchābhūmaṃ aparadisāyaṃ niviṭṭhaṃ janapadaṃ gantukāmā. Nivāsanti temāsaṃ vassāvāsaṃ. Apalokitoti āpucchito. Apalokethāti āpucchatha. Kasmā theraṃ āpucchāpeti? Te sabhāre kātukāmatāya. Yo hi ekavihāre vasantopi santikaṃ na gacchati pakkamanto anāpucchā pakkamati, ayaṃ nibbhāro nāma. Yo ekavihāre vasantopi āgantvā passati, pakkamanto āpucchati, ayaṃ sabhāro nāma. Imepi bhikkhū bhagavā ‘‘evamime sīlādīhi vaḍḍhissantī’’ti sabhāre kātukāmo āpucchāpeti.
所谓“智者”,就是具备界善巧等四种智慧的人。所谓“摄受者”,就是以物质上的帮助和法上的帮助这两种方式帮助他人的人。据说,这位长老不像其他比丘那样一早就去乞食,而是等所有比丘都出去后,巡视整座僧园,清扫没有打扫过的地方,倒掉没有扔掉的垃圾,把僧园里乱放的床、椅、木器、陶器整理好。为什么要这样做呢?他说:“免得外道进来看到杂乱,生出轻蔑。”然后他去病房,安慰生病的比丘,问他们“需要什么”,问清楚需要之后,就带着年轻的沙弥,通过乞食的方式或到合适的地方去找药,找到后给他们,然后嘱咐说:“照顾病人是佛陀和独觉佛所赞叹的。去吧,善士们,不要放逸。”之后他自己才去乞食,或者在护持他的施主家受供后回寺院。这就是他在常住处所一贯做的。巴利
Paṇḍitoti dhātukosallādinā catubbidhena paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Anuggāhakoti āmisānuggahena ca dhammānuggahena cāti dvīhipi anuggahehi anuggāhako. Thero kira aññe bhikkhū viya pātova piṇḍāya agantvā sabbabhikkhūsu gatesu sakalaṃ saṅghārāmaṃ anuvicaranto asammaṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ sammajjati, achaḍḍitaṃ kacavaraṃ chaḍḍeti, saṅghārāme dunnikkhittāni mañcapīṭhadārubhaṇḍamattikābhaṇḍāni paṭisāmeti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? ‘‘Mā aññatitthiyā vihāraṃ paviṭṭhā disvā paribhavaṃ akaṃsū’’ti. Tato gilānasālaṃ gantvā gilāne assāsetvā ‘‘kenattho’’ti pucchitvā yena attho hoti, tadatthaṃ tesaṃ daharasāmaṇere ādāya bhikkhācāravattena vā sabhāgaṭṭhāne vā bhesajjaṃ pariyesitvā tesaṃ datvā, ‘‘gilānupaṭṭhānaṃ nāma buddhapaccekabuddhehi vaṇṇitaṃ, gacchatha sappurisā appamattā hothā’’ti te pesetvā sayaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā upaṭṭhākakule vā bhattakiccaṃ katvā vihāraṃ gacchati. Idaṃ tāvassa nibaddhavāsaṭṭhāne āciṇṇaṃ.
世尊在外游行时,他并不会因为想着“我是上首弟子”就穿上鞋子、拿着伞盖走在最前面。相反,对于那些年老、生病或太年轻的比丘,他会用油涂抹他们疼痛的地方,然后让身边的年少沙弥替他们拿着衣钵,当天或第二天让他们带着东西才上路。有一次,某位尊者因为到得太晚,没分到住处,就坐在衣堂里。导师看到后,第二天召集比丘僧团,讲了象、猴、鹧鸪的故事,然后制定学处:“住处应按戒腊长幼来分配。”他就是这样以物质上的帮助来照顾人。而在教诫时,他对同一个人教诫百次、千次,直到那人证得入流果,才放下他,再去教诫别人。按照这种方式,在他的教诫下安住于教诫而证得阿罗汉果的人,多到无法计算。他就是这样以法的帮助来摄受众生。巴利
Bhagavati pana cārikaṃ caramāne ‘‘ahaṃ aggasāvako’’ti upāhanaṃ āruyha chattaṃ gahetvā purato purato na gacchati. Ye pana tattha mahallakā vā ābādhikā vā atidaharā vā, tesaṃ rujjanaṭṭhānāni telena makkhāpetvā pattacīvaraṃ attano daharasāmaṇerehi gāhāpetvā taṃdivasaṃ vā dutiyadivasaṃ vā te gaṇhitvāva gacchati. Ekadivasañhi taññeva āyasmantaṃ ativikāle sampattattā senāsanaṃ alabhitvā, cīvarakuṭiyaṃ nisinnaṃ disvā, satthā punadivase bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā, hatthivānaratittiravatthuṃ kathetvā, ‘‘yathāvuḍḍhaṃ senāsanaṃ dātabba’’nti sikkhāpadaṃ paññāpesi. Evaṃ tāvesa āmisānuggahena anuggaṇhāti. Ovadanto panesa satavārampi sahassavārampi tāva ovadati, yāva so puggalo sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāti, atha naṃ vissajjetvā aññaṃ ovadati. Iminā nayena ovadato cassa ovāde ṭhatvā arahattaṃ pattā gaṇanapathaṃ atikkantā. Evaṃ dhammānuggahena anuggaṇhāti.
那些比丘回答说:“他又不是我们的戒师,也不是我们的老师,也不是我们亲近的同伴。我们去他跟前做什么呢?”但他们并没有沉默不语,而是应了一声“是的,尊者”,接受了世尊的吩咐。“在羊角藤丛中”:即在羊角藤丛亭中。据说那羊角藤丛生长在常年有水的地方。于是他们在那里用四根柱子搭起一座亭子,把那藤丛引到上面,藤丛就遮住了亭子。然后在下面用砖砌好,铺上细沙,安设了座位。那里凉爽,是白天休息的地方,有水风吹来。长老就坐在那里。针对这个情形,才说“在羊角藤丛中”。巴利
Paccassosunti te bhikkhū ‘‘amhākaṃ neva upajjhāyo, na ācariyo na sandiṭṭhasambhatto. Kiṃ tassa santike karissāmā’’ti? Tuṇhībhāvaṃ anāpajjitvā ‘‘evaṃ, bhante’’ti satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu. Eḷagalāgumbeti gacchamaṇḍapake. So kira eḷagalāgumbo dhuvasalilaṭṭhāne jāto. Athettha catūhi pādehi maṇḍapaṃ katvā tassa upari taṃ gumbaṃ āropesuṃ, so taṃ maṇḍapaṃ chādesi. Athassa heṭṭhā iṭṭhakāhi paricinitvā vālikaṃ okiritvā āsanaṃ paññāpayiṃsu. Sītalaṃ divāṭṭhānaṃ udakavāto vāyati. Thero tasmiṃ nisīdi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘eḷagalāgumbe’’ti.
“来自不同国土的”:指属于某一位国王统治下的、种种不同国土的事物。“他国”:指另一个王国。就像相对于自己的家乡而有他乡一样,相对于自己居住的王国,另一个王国就叫作“他国”,这里说的就是这个意思。“刹帝利智者”:指频婆娑罗王、憍萨罗王等有智慧的国王。“婆罗门智者”:指商佉、多卢伽等有智慧的婆罗门。“居士智者”:指质多、须达多等有智慧的在家居士。“沙门智者”:指萨毗耶、毕洛提迦等有智慧的游方者。“考察者”:指探寻义理的人。“主张什么”:意思是他说自己持什么见解,也就是持什么理论主张。“宣说什么”:意思是他对弟子们宣说什么样的教导和训诫?“法与随法”:指对世尊所说之解的随顺解说。“如法的”:指有正当理由的。“论与随论”:指对世尊所说之论的随顺之论。也有读作“vādānupāto”的,意思是随顺导师之论而随行、跟随。通过这一点也表明,他是随顺论议的,本身就是在论议。巴利
Nānāverajjagatanti ekassa rañño rajjato nānāvidhaṃ rajjagataṃ. Virajjanti aññaṃ rajjaṃ. Yathā hi sadesato añño videso, evaṃ nivuttharajjato aññaṃ rajjaṃ virajjaṃ nāma, taṃ verajjanti vuttaṃ. Khattiyapaṇḍitāti bimbisārakosalarājādayo paṇḍitarājāno. Brāhmaṇapaṇḍitāti caṅkītārukkhādayo paṇḍitabrāhmaṇā. Gahapatipaṇḍitāti cittasudattādayo paṇḍitagahapatayo. Samaṇapaṇḍitāti sabhiyapilotikādayo paṇḍitaparibbājakā . Vīmaṃsakāti atthagavesino. Kiṃvādīti kiṃ attano dassanaṃ vadati, kiṃ laddhikoti attho. Kimakkhāyīti kiṃ sāvakānaṃ ovādānusāsaniṃ ācikkhati? Dhammassa cānudhammanti bhagavatā vuttabyākaraṇassa anubyākaraṇaṃ. Sahadhammikoti sakāraṇo. Vādānuvādoti bhagavatā vuttavādassa anuvādo. ‘‘Vādānupāto’’tipi pāṭho, satthu vādassa anupāto anupatanaṃ, anugamananti attho. Imināpi vādaṃ anugato vādoyeva dīpito hoti.
在“未离贪者”等说法里,要理解到:这里的意思完全是就渴爱来说的。因为渴爱有染著的性质,所以称为贪;有欲求的性质,所以称为欲;有喜爱的性质,所以称为爱;有想喝、渴求的性质,所以称为渴;有烧灼、煎熬的性质,所以称为遍烧。道友,为什么要开始说“于不善法”等这些内容呢?是为了显示:对五蕴未离贪者的过患,以及对已离贪者的功德。其中,“无恼害”就是没有痛苦;“无愁悲”就是没有内心的热恼;“无遍烧”就是没有内在的燃烧。在所有这些地方,都应这样理解其含义。第二。巴利
Avigatarāgassātiādīsu taṇhāvaseneva attho veditabbo. Taṇhā hi rajjanato rāgo, chandiyanato chando, piyāyanaṭṭhena pemaṃ, pivitukāmaṭṭhena pipāsā, anudahanaṭṭhena pariḷāhoti vuccati. Akusale cāvuso, dhammetiādi kasmā āraddhaṃ? Pañcasu khandhesu avītarāgassa ādīnavaṃ , vītarāgassa ca ānisaṃsaṃ dassetuṃ. Tatra avighātoti niddukkho. Anupāyāsoti nirupatāpo. Apariḷāhoti niddāho. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《诃梨帝迦尼经》的注释巴利
3. Hāliddikānisuttavaṇṇanā
3 第三项中,“在阿槃提”:指被称为阿槃提南道的阿槃提国。“在库拉拉城”:指在一座叫这个名字的城市。“在断崖”:指在一侧是悬崖的地方。据说那座山的一侧像是被削断后塌落下来一样。也有写成“Pavatte”的版本,意思是各种外道见解流行的场所。长老就是在这个国家里,依止那座城市,住在那一座山上。“诃梨提迦尼”:是这样一个名字。“在《八颂品》中摩犍提所问”:在《八颂品》里有一段叫“摩犍提耶问”,就是指那一段经文。“色蕴”:这里指的是色蕴。“于色界被贪所系缚”:指在色界中被贪所束缚。“识”:指业识。“住家”:指住于家、住于执著。巴利
3. Tatiye avantīsūti avantidakkhiṇāpathasaṅkhāte avantiraṭṭhe. Kuraraghareti evaṃnāmake nagare. Papāteti ekato papāte. Tassa kira pabbatassa ekaṃ passaṃ chinditvā pātitaṃ viya ahosi. ‘‘Pavatte’’tipi pāṭho, nānātitthiyānaṃ laddhipavattaṭṭhāneti attho. Iti thero tasmiṃ raṭṭhe taṃ nagaraṃ nissāya tasmiṃ pabbate viharati. Hāliddikānīti evaṃnāmako. Aṭṭhakavaggiye māgaṇḍiyapañheti aṭṭhakavaggikamhi māgaṇḍiyapañho nāma atthi, tasmiṃ pañhe. Rūpadhātūti rūpakkhandho adhippeto. Rūpadhāturāgavinibaddhanti rūpadhātumhi rāgena vinibaddhaṃ . Viññāṇanti kammaviññāṇaṃ. Okasārīti gehasārī ālayasārī.
那么,为什么这里没有说“居士,识界”呢?这是为了消除迷惑。因为从含义上说,“住处”指的就是缘。前生的业识,是后生的业识和果报识的缘;果报识,也是后生的果报识和业识的缘。所以,如果问“这里说的到底是哪一种识呢?”就会产生迷惑。为了消除这种迷惑,这里没有单独取出“识”来说,而是作了一番不混淆的开示。另外,也是为了说明依所缘而说的四种造作识的安住之处,所以这里没有单独取出“识”来说。巴利
Kasmā panettha ‘‘viññāṇadhātu kho, gahapatī’’ti na vuttanti? Sammohavighātatthaṃ. ‘‘Oko’’ti hi atthato paccayo vuccati, purejātañca kammaviññāṇaṃ pacchājātassa kammaviññāṇassapi vipākaviññāṇassapi vipākaviññāṇañca vipākaviññāṇassapi kammaviññāṇassapi paccayo hoti, tasmā ‘‘kataraṃ nu kho idha viññāṇa’’nti? Sammoho bhaveyya, tassa vighātatthaṃ taṃ agahetvā asambhinnāva desanā katā. Apica ārammaṇavasena catasso abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṭṭhitiyo vuttāti tā dassetumpi idha viññāṇaṃ na gahitaṃ.
所谓依着与取,就是依着渴爱之着和邪见之着这两种依着,以及欲取等四种取。心的住立、深执与随眠,是指作为不善心安住的基础、深执的倾向以及潜伏的烦恼。如来,就是指正自觉者。其实一切漏尽者都已断除这些烦恼,但因为世尊漏尽的功德在世间极为显著,所以用最高程度的说法来表达。于识界,这里为什么特别提到识呢?是为了显示烦恼的断除。因为烦恼不只是在其余四蕴中被断除,而是在全部五蕴中都能被断除,所以为了显示烦恼的断除而特别提到识。居士,像这样,当业识不再趋赴、执着于家宅时,就叫做不住家者。巴利
Upayupādānāti taṇhūpayadiṭṭhūpayavasena dve upayā, kāmupādānādīni cattāri upādānāni ca. Cetaso adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayāti akusalacittassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtā ceva abhinivesabhūtā ca anusayabhūtā ca. Tathāgatassāti sammāsambuddhassa. Sabbesampi hi khīṇāsavānaṃ ete pahīnāva, satthu pana khīṇāsavabhāvo loke atipākaṭoti uparimakoṭiyā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Viññāṇadhātuyāti idha viññāṇaṃ kasmā gahitaṃ? Kilesappahānadassanatthaṃ. Kilesā hi na kevalaṃ catūsuyeva khandhesu pahīnā pahīyanti, pañcasupi pahīyantiyevāti kilesappahānadassanatthaṃ gahitaṃ. Evaṃ kho, gahapati, anokasārī hotīti evaṃ kammaviññāṇena okaṃ asarantena anokasārī nāma hoti.
色相与巢窟的散漫与系缚:色本身以作为烦恼之缘的意义而称为“相”,以作为所缘作用之住处而称为“巢窟”,所以合称“色相与巢窟”。散漫与系缚合为“散漫与系缚”。这两者确实说明了烦恼的蔓延状态和系缚状态。在色相与巢窟中的散漫与系缚,就称为“色相巢窟散漫系缚”,意思是在色相与巢窟中生起的烦恼之散漫与烦恼之系缚。“被称为巢窟游行者”:以作所缘的方式游走于住处,所以称为游行者。“已断”:那些色相巢窟的烦恼散漫与系缚已被断除。巴利
Rūpanimittaniketavisāravinibandhāti rūpameva kilesānaṃ paccayaṭṭhena nimittaṃ, ārammaṇakiriyasaṅkhātanivāsanaṭṭhānaṭṭhena niketanti rūpanimittaniketaṃ. Visāro ca vinibandho ca visāravinibandhā. Ubhayenapi hi kilesānaṃ patthaṭabhāvo ca vinibandhanabhāvo ca vutto, rūpanimittanikete visāravinibandhāti rūpanimittaniketavisāravinibandhā, tasmā rūpanimittaniketamhi uppannena kilesavisārena ceva kilesabandhanena cāti attho. Niketasārīti vuccatīti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ sārīti vuccati. Pahīnāti te rūpanimittaniketakilesavisāravinibandhā pahīnā.
那么,为什么这里把五蕴说成“窟宅”,把六种所缘说成“巢窟”呢?因为欲贪有强有弱。虽然这两者都是执著的对象、都是境界,但“窟宅”指的是长期固定的住处,也就是家;而“巢窟”指的是像“今天我们去某个地方玩”这样约好的住处,比如园林之类。就像在儿女、妻子、财产、粮食满满当当的家里,欲贪会很强;对内在的五蕴也是这样。而在园林之类的地方,欲贪就比在家里弱;对外在的六种所缘也是这样。要知道,正是因为欲贪有强有弱,才这样说法。巴利
Kasmā panettha pañcakkhandhā ‘‘okā’’ti vuttā, cha ārammaṇāni ‘‘niketa’’nti? Chandarāgassa balavadubbalatāya. Samānepi hi etesaṃ ālayaṭṭhena visayabhāve okoti niccanivāsanaṭṭhānagehameva vuccati, niketanti ‘‘ajja asukaṭṭhāne kīḷissāmā’’ti katasaṅketaṭṭhānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ uyyānādi. Tattha yathā puttadāradhanadhaññapuṇṇagehe chandarāgo balavā hoti, evaṃ ajjhattikesu khandhesu. Yathā pana uyyānaṭṭhānādīsu tato dubbalataro hoti, evaṃ bāhiresu chasu ārammaṇesūti chandarāgassa balavadubbalatāya evaṃ desanā katāti veditabbo.
在快乐的人当中他是快乐的:当侍者们因为得到财物、粮食等而快乐时,他因为想着“我现在要得到合意的食物了”这种在家人式的快乐而快乐,就像在和他们一起享受所获得的成就一样过日子。在痛苦的人当中他是痛苦的:当他们因为某种原因而生起痛苦时,他自己就以加倍的痛苦而痛苦。在应当做的事上:指在被称为事务的应做之事上。他投入其中:就是自己承担起那些事务应当去做的性质。在诸欲上:指事物之欲。居士,这样就是不空于欲:这样就是不空于烦恼欲,因为内心有欲而不空虚。应当知道,善的那一边则因为那些不存在而空、空虚。巴利
Sukhitesu sukhitoti upaṭṭhākesu dhanadhaññalābhādivasena sukhitesu ‘‘idānāhaṃ manāpaṃ bhojanaṃ labhissāmī’’ti gehasitasukhena sukhito hoti, tehi pattasampattiṃ anubhavamāno viya carati. Dukkhitesu dukkhitoti tesaṃ kenacideva kāraṇena dukkhe uppanne sayaṃ dviguṇena dukkhena dukkhito hoti. Kiccakaraṇīyesūti kiccasaṅkhātesu karaṇīyesu. Tesu yogaṃ āpajjatīti upayogaṃ sayaṃ tesaṃ kiccānaṃ kattabbataṃ āpajjati. Kāmesūti vatthukāmesu. Evaṃ kho, gahapati, kāmehi aritto hotīti evaṃ kilesakāmehi aritto hoti anto kāmānaṃ bhāvena atuccho. Sukkapakkho tesaṃ abhāvena ritto tucchoti veditabbo.
把轮回放在前面来做的,就是“Purakkharāno”(把轮回摆在前面的人)。在“愿我成为这样的色”等说法里,他对于长、短、黑、白等种种色,渴求“愿我成为这样的色”。对于乐等种种受,就渴求“愿我成为这样受的人”;对于青等种种想,就渴求“愿我成为这样想的人”;对于福行等种种行,就渴求“愿我成为这样行的人”;对于眼识等种种识,就渴求“愿我成为这样识的人”。巴利
Purakkharānoti vaṭṭaṃ purato kurumāno. Evaṃrūpo siyantiādīsu dīgharassakāḷodātādīsu rūpesu ‘‘evaṃrūpo nāma bhaveyya’’nti pattheti. Sukhādīsu vedanāsu evaṃvedano nāma; nīlasaññādīsu saññāsu evaṃ sañño nāma; puññābhisaṅkhārādīsu saṅkhāresu evaṃsaṅkhāro nāma; cakkhuviññāṇādīsu viññāṇesu ‘‘evaṃ viññāṇo nāma bhaveyya’’nti pattheti.
“不前驱者”是指不把轮回置于前面。我的言说是连贯的,你的言说是不连贯的;你的话不连贯、不衔接,而我的话则是连贯、顺畅,像甘美的饮料一样。你长久以来所熟习、善巧掌握的东西,一遇到我的论说,就在刹那间全部反转、退回去了。你的过失已经被我指出来了。为了从这场论说中解脱,你就去各处游方吧,去亲近各位师长,进一步寻求答案。或者,如果你自己有本事,就在这里把它解开吧。第三。巴利
Apurakkharānoti vaṭṭaṃ purato akurumāno. Sahitaṃ me, asahitaṃ teti tuyhaṃ vacanaṃ asahitaṃ asiliṭṭhaṃ, mayhaṃ sahitaṃ siliṭṭhaṃ madhurapānasadisaṃ. Adhiciṇṇaṃ te viparāvattanti yaṃ tuyhaṃ dīghena kālena paricitaṃ suppaguṇaṃ, taṃ mama vādaṃ āgamma sabbaṃ khaṇena viparāvattaṃ nivattaṃ. Āropito te vādoti tuyhaṃ doso mayā āropito. Cara vādappamokkhāyāti taṃ taṃ ācariyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā uttari pariyesanto imassa vādassa mokkhāya cara āhiṇḍāhi. Nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosīti atha sayameva pahosi, idheva nibbeṭhehīti. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 《第二诃梨提迦尼经》的注释巴利
4. Dutiyahāliddikānisuttavaṇṇanā
4 第四经的注释中,说到“帝释问”时,指的是《小帝释问经》,这在《大帝释问经》里也已经讲过了。“爱尽解脱”是指:在爱尽——也就是涅槃——之中,以涅槃为所缘,由果解脱而得到解脱。“究竟无上”是指超越了边际的究竟、恒常的究竟。剩下那些句子的理解方式也是这样。第四。巴利
4. Catutthe sakkapañheti cūḷasakkapañhe, mahāsakkapañhepetaṃ vuttameva. Taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttāti taṇhāsaṅkhaye nibbāne tadārammaṇāya phalavimuttiyā vimuttā. Accantaniṭṭhāti antaṃ atikkantaniṭṭhā satataniṭṭhā. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Catutthaṃ.
《定经》的注释巴利
5. Samādhisuttavaṇṇanā
5 第五经中,“定”是指:世尊看见那些比丘在心一境性上退失,知道“如果这些人得到心一境性,他们的业处就会增长”,因此说了这部经。“欢喜”就是渴望。“称扬”就是由于那种欢喜而说出“啊,可爱的、可意的、悦意的、合意的”这样的话。即使只是用言语表达欢喜,也是依着那个所缘而生起贪,这就叫作称扬。“吞没而住”就是吞下去、彻底消化之后执取而住。“于色上的喜”是指对色有强烈的欲求,这叫作喜。“那是取”是指以执取之义为取。“不欢喜”就是不渴望。“不称扬”就是不以欲求的方式说“可意、悦意”。即使以观心之意作出“无常、苦”的语表,也仍然是不称扬。第五。巴利
5. Pañcame samādhinti idaṃ bhagavā te bhikkhū cittekaggatāya parihāyante disvā, ‘‘cittekaggataṃ labhantānaṃ imesaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gamissatī’’ti ñatvā āha. Abhinandatīti pattheti. Abhivadatīti tāya abhinandanāya ‘‘aho piyaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpa’’nti vadati. Vācaṃ abhinandantopi ca taṃ ārammaṇaṃ nissāya evaṃ lobhaṃ uppādento abhivadatiyeva nāma. Ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gaṇhāti. Yārūpe nandīti yā sā rūpe balavapatthanāsaṅkhātā nandī. Tadupādānanti taṃ gahaṇaṭṭhena upādānaṃ. Nābhinandatīti na pattheti. Nābhivadatīti patthanāvasena na ‘‘iṭṭhaṃ kanta’’nti vadati. Vipassanācittena cetasā ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkha’’nti vacībhedaṃ karontopi nābhivadatiyeva. Pañcamaṃ.
第6经 独处经的注释巴利
6. Paṭisallāṇasuttavaṇṇanā
6 第六经中,“独处”这一段:世尊看见那些比丘退失了身远离,知道“如果这些人获得身远离,他们的业处就会增长”,于是说了这部经。第六经。巴利
6. Chaṭṭhe paṭisallāṇeti idaṃ bhagavā te bhikkhū kāyavivekena parihāyante disvā ‘‘kāyavivekaṃ labhantānaṃ imesaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gamissatī’’ti ñatvā āha. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《取恐惧经》的注释巴利
7. Upādāparitassanāsuttavaṇṇanā
7 第七经中,“执取恐惧”是指因为执取而生起的恐惧。“不执取不恐惧”是指因为没有执取而无所恐惧。“识随色的变异而流转”是说,以“我的色变异了”或者“啊,我曾经有它,如今却没有了”这样的方式,业识随着色的坏灭而流转。“由变异随转而生的”是指从随变异流转、以变异为所缘的心生起的。“恐惧与诸法的生起”是指渴爱的恐惧以及不善法的生起。“心”是指善心。“征服而住”是指征服之后而住。“有怖畏”是指带有怖畏。“有苦恼”是指带有苦恼、带有痛苦。“有期求”是指带有贪著。“执取之后而恐惧”是指执取之后就成了恐惧者。“不随色的变异而流转”是说,漏尽者根本没有业识,因此应当说不会随色的坏灭而流转。第七。巴利
7. Sattame upādāparitassananti gahaṇena uppannaṃ paritassanaṃ. Anupādāaparitassananti aggahaṇena aparitassanaṃ. Rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattiviññāṇaṃ hotīti ‘‘mama rūpaṃ vipariṇata’’nti vā ‘‘ahu vata metaṃ, dāni vata me natthī’’ti vā ādinā nayena kammaviññāṇaṃ rūpassa bhedānuparivatti hoti. Vipariṇāmānuparivattijāti vipariṇāmassa anuparivattito vipariṇāmārammaṇacittato jātā. Paritassanā dhammasamuppādāti taṇhāparitassanā ca akusaladhammasamuppādā ca. Cittanti kusalacittaṃ. Pariyādāya tiṭṭhantīti pariyādiyitvā tiṭṭhanti. Uttāsavāti sauttāso. Vighātavāti savighāto sadukkho. Apekkhavāti sālayo. Upādāya ca paritassatīti gaṇhitvā paritassako nāma hoti. Na rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattīti khīṇāsavassa kammaviññāṇameva natthi, tasmā rūpabhedānuparivatti na hotīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sattamaṃ.
《第二执取恐惧经》的注释巴利
8. Dutiyaupādāparitassanāsuttavaṇṇanā
8 第八经的开示是围绕渴爱、慢和见而作的。就这样,在这连续四部经里,所说的正是流转与还灭。第八经结束。巴利
8. Aṭṭhame taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena desanā katā. Iti paṭipāṭiyā catūsu suttesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
《三时无常经》的注释巴利
9. Kālattayaaniccasuttavaṇṇanā
9 第九经:“更何况是现在呢?”意思是:对于现在,根本没什么可多说的,它同样是无常。据说那些比丘已经观察到过去和未来是无常的,却在当下这件事上感到困惑疲惫。导师知道他们的根性倾向后,心想:如果对他们说“现在也是无常”,他们就能领悟。于是导师根据这些人的根性倾向作了这番开示。第九经结束。巴利
9. Navame ko pana vādo paccuppannassāti paccuppannamhi kathāva kā, aniccameva taṃ. Te kira bhikkhū atītānāgataṃ aniccanti sallakkhetvā paccuppanne kilamiṃsu, atha nesaṃ ito atītānāgatepi ‘‘paccuppannaṃ anicca’’nti vuccamāne bujjhissantīti ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā satthā puggalajjhāsayena imaṃ desanaṃ desesi. Navamaṃ.
10-11. 《三时苦经》等的注释巴利
10-11. Kālattayadukkhasuttādivaṇṇanā
10-11 第十经和第十一经里,用“苦”“无我”这些词加以区分,是依照同样类型的个人根性而说的。第十经、第十一经结束。巴利
10-11. Dasamekādasamāni dukkhaṃ anattāti padehi visesetvā tathārūpeneva puggalajjhāsayena kathitānīti. Dasamekādasamāni.
1-10. 《无常经》等经的注释巴利
1-10. Aniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
12-21 第十二到二十一。在无常品里,最后一篇经是依提问而说的,其余各经则是依如是如是各类觉悟者而说的。第一经等。巴利
12-21. Aniccavagge pariyosānasuttaṃ pucchāvasikaṃ, sesāni tathā tathā bujjhanakānañca vasena desitānīti. Paṭhamādīni.
《重担经》的注释巴利
1. Bhārasuttavaṇṇanā
22 22. 在《负担品》第一经中,“应当对他说五取蕴”:意思是应当说“五取蕴”,应当这样说。比丘们,这被称为负担,也就是这五取蕴,这被称为负担。以什么含义(称为负担)呢?以照料沉重的含义。因为对它们做使站立、使行走、使坐下、使躺卧、使沐浴、使装饰、使喂食、使进食等种种照料,都是沉重的,所以从“照料沉重”这一含义来说,称为负担。“这样的名字”:就是提舍、达多之类的名字。“这样的种姓”:就是黑族、牛族之类的种姓。如此,以世俗称谓而安立的补特伽罗,被指认为“负担的背负者”。因为补特伽罗在结生的那一刹那就担起了蕴的负担,即使活到十岁、二十岁乃至一百岁,尽其一生都在为这蕴的负担沐浴、喂食,让它坐在柔软舒适的床椅上,让它躺卧,如此照料之后,在死亡的那一刹那将其丢弃,又在结生的那一刹那执取另一个蕴的负担,因此他就成了“负担的背负者”。巴利
22. Bhāravaggassa paṭhame pañcupādānakkhandhātissa vacanīyanti pañcupādānakkhandhā iti assa vacanīyaṃ, evaṃ vattabbaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhāroti ye ime pañcupādānakkhandhā, ayaṃ bhāroti vuccati. Kenaṭṭhenāti? Parihārabhāriyaṭṭhena. Etesañhi ṭhāpanagamananisīdāpananipajjāpananhāpanamaṇḍanakhādāpanabhuñjāpanādiparihāro bhāriyoti parihārabhāriyaṭṭhena bhāroti vuccati. Evaṃnāmoti tisso dattotiādināmo. Evaṃgottoti kaṇhāyano vacchāyanotiādigotto. Iti vohāramattasiddhaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘bhārahāro’’ti katvā dasseti. Puggalo hi paṭisandhikkhaṇeyeva khandhabhāraṃ ukkhipitvā dasapi vassāni vīsatipi vassasatampīti yāvajīvaṃ imaṃ khandhabhāraṃ nhāpento bhojento mudusamphassamañcapīṭhesu nisīdāpento nipajjāpento pariharitvā cutikkhaṇe chaḍḍetvā puna paṭisandhikkhaṇe aparaṃ khandhabhāraṃ ādiyati, tasmā bhārahāroti jāto.
导致再生是指产生新的再生。与喜贪同在是指和喜贪完全合在一起。这里要说的,正是与那种状态同行。到处都欢喜是指在投生的地方,或者在色等所缘对象中,处处都有欢喜的习惯。在欲爱等当中,对五种感官享乐的贪染叫欲爱;对色界、无色界存在的贪染,对禅那的喜爱,以及与常执见相伴的贪染,叫有爱;与断见相伴的贪染,叫无有爱。执取负担就是抓取负担。正是由于渴爱,他才执取这个负担。无余离贪灭尽等全部都是涅槃的同义词。因为依于它,渴爱才无余地离贪、灭尽、舍弃、放下、解脱,这里没有欲贪的执著,也没有见执的执著,所以涅槃获得这些名称。根连渴爱是指无明是渴爱的根。拔除是指以阿罗汉道将根连渴爱拔起。无渴爱而般涅槃是指无有渴爱者,才可称为般涅槃者。第一。巴利
Ponobhavikāti punabbhavanibbattikā. Nandīrāgasahagatāti nandirāgena saha ekattameva gatā. Tabbhāvasahagatañhi idha adhippetaṃ. Tatra tatrābhinandinīti upapattiṭṭhāne vā rūpādīsu vā ārammaṇesu tattha tattha abhinandanasīlāva. Kāmataṇhādīsu pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmataṇhā nāma, rūpārūpabhavarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgoti ayaṃ bhavataṇhā nāma, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo vibhavataṇhā nāma. Bhārādānanti bhāragahaṇaṃ. Taṇhāya hi esa bhāraṃ ādiyati. Asesavirāganirodhotiādi sabbaṃ nibbānasseva vevacanaṃ. Tañhi āgamma taṇhā asesato virajjati nirujjhati cajiyati paṭinissajjiyati vimuccati, natthi cettha kāmālayo vā diṭṭhālayo vāti nibbānaṃ etāni nāmāni labhati. Samūlaṃ taṇhanti taṇhāya avijjā mūlaṃ nāma. Abbuyhāti arahattamaggena taṃ samūlakaṃ uddharitvā. Nicchāto parinibbutoti nittaṇho parinibbuto nāmāti vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 《遍知经》的注释巴利
2. Pariññasuttavaṇṇanā
23 在第二经中,“应遍知”指的是应当遍知、应当超越,这就是它的含义。“遍知”是指彻底的遍知,“超越”就是意思。“贪尽”等是涅槃的名称,因为涅槃就是彻底的遍知。第二经结束。巴利
23. Dutiye pariññeyyeti parijānitabbe, samatikkamitabbeti attho. Pariññanti accantapariññaṃ, samatikkamanti attho. Rāgakkhayotiādi nibbānassa nāmaṃ. Tañhi accantapariññā nāma. Dutiyaṃ.
《证知经》的注释巴利
3. Abhijānasuttavaṇṇanā
24 在第三经中,“证知”就是了知。通过这句说明了知遍知;通过第二句说明审察遍知;通过第三句和第四句说明断遍知。在这部经里,一共说了三种遍知。第三。巴利
24. Tatiye abhijānanti abhijānanto. Iminā ñātapariññā kathitā, dutiyapadena tīraṇapariññā, tatiyacatutthehi pahānapariññāti imasmiṃ sutte tisso pariññā kathitāti. Tatiyaṃ.
《欲贪经》等经的注释巴利
4-9. Chandarāgasuttādivaṇṇanā
25-30 第四部经等,应当依照《界相应》里已经说过的方法来理解。不过在这里,按顺序来说,第五、第六、第七部经讲的是四圣谛,第八、第九部经讲的是轮回与还灭。第四部经等(结束)。巴利
25-30. Catutthādīni dhātusaṃyutte vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Paṭipāṭiyā panettha pañcamachaṭṭhasattamesu cattāri saccāni kathitāni, aṭṭhamanavamesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ. Catutthādīni.
第10经《苦根经》的注释巴利
10. Aghamūlasuttavaṇṇanā
31 第三十一节:第十经中,“agha”就是苦。这里只讲了苦的特征。第十。巴利
31. Dasame aghanti dukkhaṃ. Evamettha dukkhalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ. Dasamaṃ.
第11章《坏灭经》的注释巴利
11. Pabhaṅgusuttavaṇṇanā
32 32. 第十一经中,“pabhaṅgu”的意思是具有坏灭的性质。这样一来,这里说的就只是无常相。第十一经。巴利
32. Ekādasame pabhaṅgunti pabhijjanasabhāvaṃ. Evamidha aniccalakkhaṇameva kathitanti. Ekādasamaṃ.
4. 非汝所有品巴利
4. Natumhākavaggo
《非你们所有经》的注释巴利
1. Natumhākasuttavaṇṇanā
33 33. 《非你们所有品》第一经中,“舍弃”是指通过断除欲贪来舍弃。在“草”等之中,所谓“草”,是指内部是边材、外部是实心的,比如棕榈、椰子等。所谓“木”,是指内部实心、外部是边材的,比如相思树、婆罗双树、柚木、波罗蜜树等。所谓“枝”,是指像树的手臂一样伸出来的部分。所谓“叶”,是指棕榈、椰子等的叶子。第一。巴利
33. Natumhākavaggassa paṭhame pajahathāti chandarāgappahānena pajahatha. Tiṇādīsu tiṇaṃ nāma antopheggu bahisāraṃ tālanāḷikerādi. Kaṭṭhaṃ nāma antosāraṃ bahipheggu khadirasālasākapanasādi. Sākhā nāma rukkhassa bāhā viya nikkhantā. Palāsaṃ nāma tālanāḷikerapaṇṇādi. Paṭhamaṃ.
第二《非汝所有经》的注释巴利
2. Dutiyanatumhākasuttavaṇṇanā
34 第二经是根据那些不靠譬喻就能觉悟的人的意乐而说的。第二。巴利
34. Dutiyaṃ vinā upamāya bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.
某比丘经的注释巴利
3. Aññatarabhikkhusuttavaṇṇanā
35 第三经:尊者,如果说色会随眠,意思就是色确实在随眠。以此而得名:在欲贪等随眠中,是哪种随眠让那个色随眠,就正是以那种随眠,它才被称作贪染者、嗔怒者、愚痴者。不以此而得名:不是以那种并不真实的随眠,它才被称作贪染者、嗔怒者、愚痴者。第三经。巴利
35. Tatiye rūpañce, bhante, anusetīti yadi rūpaṃ anuseti. Tena saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti kāmarāgādīsu yena anusayena taṃ rūpaṃ anuseti, teneva anusayena ‘‘ratto duṭṭho mūḷho’’ti paṇṇattiṃ gacchati. Na tena saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti tena abhūtena anusayena ‘‘ratto duṭṭho mūḷho’’ti saṅkhaṃ na gacchatīti. Tatiyaṃ.
第四 第二某比丘经的注释巴利
4. Dutiyaaññatarabhikkhusuttavaṇṇanā
36 第四经:所谓“那被随逐”,意思是:那个随眠潜伏其中的色,在临终时被那随眠所随逐。因为当所缘坏灭时,以彼为所缘的法确实无法安住。所谓“凡被随逐的”,是指无论什么色,被什么随眠所随逐。所谓“因此得名”,就是依那随眠而被称为“贪染者、嗔怒者、愚痴者”。另一种说法:“此”是工具格,意思是:因为什么随眠而被随逐,就因此被称为“贪染者、嗔怒者、愚痴者”。第四。巴利
36. Catutthe taṃ anumīyatīti taṃ anusayitaṃ rūpaṃ marantena anusayena anumarati. Na hi ārammaṇe bhijjamāne tadārammaṇā dhammā tiṭṭhanti. Yaṃ anumīyatīti yaṃ rūpaṃ yena anusayena anumarati. Tena saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti tena anusayena ‘‘ratto duṭṭho mūḷho’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Atha vā yanti karaṇavacanametaṃ, yena anusayena anumīyati, tena ‘‘ratto duṭṭho mūḷho’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti attho. Catutthaṃ.
《阿难经》等的注释巴利
5-6. Ānandasuttādivaṇṇanā
37-38 第五种中说“安住者的变异显现出来”,意思是:对于还活着、还在持续存在的人,老就显现出来。“安住”这个词,其实是“命根”这种维系作用的名称。“变异”则是指老。因此古德们说:巴利
37-38. Pañcame ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatīti dharamānassa jīvamānassa jarā paññāyati. Ṭhitīti hi jīvitindriyasaṅkhātāya anupālanāya nāmaṃ. Aññathattanti jarāya. Tenāhu porāṇā –
生起被说为生,坏灭被说为灭;
老被称为变异,住立则被称为维持。巴利
‘‘Uppādo jāti akkhāto, bhaṅgo vutto vayoti ca; Aññathattaṃ jarā vuttā, ṭhitī ca anupālanā’’ti.
这样,每一个蕴都有三种相,也就是生、老、坏灭。正是针对这三种相,世尊才说:比丘们,这就是有为法的三种有为相。巴利
Evaṃ ekekassa khandhassa uppādajarābhaṅgasaṅkhātāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni honti yāni sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47).
在这里,“有为”指的是任何由因缘所造作出来的行。行并不是相,相也不是行;离开行,就无法安立相;离开相,也无法安立行。不过,通过相,行才能被清楚地认识。就像母牛本身并不是相,相也不是母牛;既不能离开母牛来安立相,也不能离开相来安立母牛;但正是通过母牛的特征,母牛才被清楚地认识。这个道理也应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha saṅkhataṃ nāma paccayanibbatto yo koci saṅkhāro. Saṅkhāro ca na lakkhaṇaṃ, lakkhaṇaṃ na saṅkhāro, na ca saṅkhārena vinā lakkhaṇaṃ paññāpetuṃ sakkā, nāpi lakkhaṇaṃ vinā saṅkhāro, lakkhaṇena pana saṅkhāro pākaṭo hoti. Yathā hi na ca gāvīyeva lakkhaṇaṃ, lakkhaṇameva na gāvī, nāpi gāviṃ muñcitvā lakkhaṇaṃ paññāpetuṃ sakkā, nāpi lakkhaṇaṃ muñcitvā gāviṃ, lakkhaṇena pana gāvī pākaṭā hoti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,当诸行生起的刹那,行本身、生起的刹那,以及被称为“时”的那个刹那,都能被了知。当说“生起”时,行本身、老的特相,以及被称为“时”的那个刹那,也都能被了知。在坏灭的刹那,行本身、坏灭的特相,以及被称为“时”的那个刹那,同样都能被了知。不过另有一些论师说:“对于无色法,所谓老的刹那,其实是无法安立的。但正自觉者说‘受的生起能被了知,灭去能被了知,住立时的变异能被了知’,这样说的时候,他其实也为无色法指出了三种特相。这三种特相是依据‘有刹那’而得以成立的。”巴利
Tattha saṅkhārānaṃ uppādakkhaṇe saṅkhāropi uppādalakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyati. ‘‘Uppādopī’’ti vutte saṅkhāropi jarālakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyati. Bhaṅgakkhaṇe saṅkhāropi taṃlakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyati. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘arūpadhammānaṃ jarākhaṇo nāma na sakkā paññāpetuṃ, sammāsambuddho ca ‘vedanāya uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitāya aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’ti vadanto arūpadhammānampi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni paññāpeti, tāni atthikkhaṇaṃ upādāya labbhantī’’ti vatvā –
一切法的存在状态,就被称为“住立”。
它的坏灭就是死,恒时于一切众生。巴利
‘‘Atthitā sabbadhammānaṃ, ṭhiti nāma pavuccati; Tasseva bhedo maraṇaṃ, sabbadā sabbapāṇina’’nti. –
他们用这首老师传下来的偈颂来证明这个意思。也有人说:“‘住立’应当理解为依相续而安立的存在。”不过,因为经典里并没有这种区分,所以不应该用老师的见解去否定经典,而应该以经典本身为准。第六经的内容很清楚。第五、第六经。巴利
Imāya ācariyagāthāya tamatthaṃ sādhenti. Atha vā santativasena ṭhānaṃ ṭhitīti veditabbanti ca vadanti. Yasmā pana sutte ayaṃ viseso natthi, tasmā ācariyamatiyā suttaṃ apaṭibāhetvā suttameva pamāṇaṃ kattabbaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānameva. Pañcamachaṭṭhāni.
7-10. 《随法经》等经的注释巴利
7-10. Anudhammasuttādivaṇṇanā
39-42 39-42. 在第七经中,“随法行者”是指已经踏上随顺九种出世间法的随顺法——也就是前行道——的人。“此随法”就是指这个随顺法。“以厌离为多”是指变得多起厌离。“遍知”是指以三种遍知来了知。“解脱”是指在道刹那生起的断遍知而得到解脱。如此,在这部经里说的就是道;同样地,后面三部经也是这样。不过在这里,随观没有确定,而在那些经里是确定的。所以在这里也应该按照那些经里确定的方式来确定。因为确实不可能离开三种随观中的任何一种,而生起厌离或遍知。第七经等。巴利
39-42. Sattame dhammānudhammappaṭipannassāti navannaṃ lokuttaradhammānaṃ anulomadhammaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannassa. Ayamanudhammoti ayaṃ anulomadhammo hoti. Nibbidābahuloti ukkaṇṭhanabahulo hutvā. Parijānātīti tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti. Parimuccatīti maggakkhaṇe uppannāya pahānapariññāya parimuccati. Evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte maggova kathito hoti, tathā ito paresu tīsu. Idha pana anupassanā aniyamitā, tesu niyamitā. Tasmā idhāpi sā tattha niyamitavaseneva niyametabbā. Na hi sakkā tīsu aññataraṃ anupassanaṃ vinā nibbindituṃ parijānituṃ vāti. Sattamādīni.
《自洲经》的注释巴利
1. Attadīpasuttavaṇṇanā
43 43. 在《自依品》的第一经中,“以自己为洲”的意思是:把自己当作洲、当作庇护、当作藏身之处、当作归处、当作依靠、当作安住之处而住。“以自己为归依”是它的同义词。“不以他人为归依”这句话是为了否定归依他人。因为他人不能成为另一个人的归依,无法靠他人的努力使他人达成成就,这一点也已经说过——巴利
43. Attadīpavaggassa paṭhame attadīpāti attānaṃ dīpaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gatiṃ parāyaṇaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ katvā viharathāti attho. Attasaraṇāti idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anaññasaraṇāti idaṃ aññassa saraṇapaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Na hi añño aññassa saraṇaṃ hoti aññassa vāyāmena aññassa asijjhanato, vuttampi cetaṃ –
自己才是自己的依靠,
有谁能真正做别人的依靠呢?巴利
‘‘Attā hi attano nātho, Ko hi nātho paro siyā’’ti. (dha. pa. 160);
因此说“不依他皈依”。那么这里说的“我”到底是什么呢?就是世间法和出世间法。所以接着又说“以法为洲,以法为依止,不依他皈依”。“因”就是原因——就像《中部》3.227等处所说的“浮弥,这确实是证得果的因”一样。“以什么为根源”就是“从什么生起”的意思。“对于色的”这一段,是为了显示断除他们那些忧苦等而开始的。“不战栗”就是不执取、不抓取。“以彼支分寂灭”,意思是由于那一种观的部分,烦恼已经止息,所以叫支分寂灭。在这部经里,讲的纯粹是观。第一经解释完毕。巴利
Tenāha ‘‘anaññasaraṇā’’ti. Ko panettha attā nāma? Lokiyalokuttaro dhammo. Tenevāha – ‘‘dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā’’ti. Yonīti kāraṇaṃ – ‘‘yoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāyā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.227) viya. Kiṃpahotikāti kiṃpabhutikā, kuto pabhavantīti attho? Rūpassa tvevāti idaṃ tesaṃyeva sokādīnaṃ pahānadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Na paritassatīti na gaṇhāti na gahati. Tadaṅganibbutoti tena vipassanaṅgena kilesānaṃ nibbutattā tadaṅganibbuto. Imasmiṃ sutte vipassanāva kathitā. Paṭhamaṃ.
第二部 道迹经的注释巴利
2. Paṭipadāsuttavaṇṇanā
44 44. 在第二经中,“导向苦集的随观”:因为五取蕴本身就是苦,而导向那苦之集起的修行之道,就是像“把色看作我”这样以见解去随观,所以这里“导向苦集的随观”就是这个意思。关于“导向苦灭的随观”:在这里,与观智一起生起的四道智被称为“随观”。这样,这部经就讲说了轮回与还灭。第二经完毕。巴利
44. Dutiye dukkhasamudayagāminī samanupassanāti yasmā sakkāyo dukkhaṃ, tassa ca samudayagāminī paṭipadā nāma ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhisamanupassanā vuttā, tasmā dukkhasamudayagāminī samanupassanāti ayamettha attho hoti. Dukkhanirodhagāminī samanupassanāti ettha saha vipassanāya catumaggañāṇaṃ ‘‘samanupassanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 无常经的注释巴利
3. Aniccasuttavaṇṇanā
45 45. 在第三经中,“应以正慧观见”,是指应以与观智一起运作的道慧来观见。“离染、解脱”,是指在道刹那离染,在果刹那解脱。“无执取而解脱诸漏”,是指以无生灭尽而灭尽的诸漏,不再被执取,这样就解脱了。“关于色界”等语,是为了显示省察而说的。也有人说是连同果一起显示省察。“安住”,是因为再没有其他应做的事,所以安住。“因安住而满足”,是因为已经证得应当证得的,所以满足。“亲自般涅槃”,是自己亲自般涅槃。第三经解释完毕。巴利
45. Tatiye sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbanti saha vipassanāya maggapaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Virajjati vimuccatīti maggakkhaṇe virajjati, phalakkhaṇe vimuccati. Anupādāya āsavehīti anuppādanirodhena niruddhehi āsavehi agahetvā iti vimuccati. Rūpadhātuyātiādi paccavekkhaṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Saha phalena paccavekkhaṇadassanatthantipi vadantiyeva. Ṭhitanti upari kattabbakiccābhāvena ṭhitaṃ. Ṭhitattā santussitanti pattabbaṃ pattabhāvena santuṭṭhaṃ. Paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatīti sayameva parinibbāyati. Tatiyaṃ.
第四部《第二无常经》的注释巴利
4. Dutiyaaniccasuttavaṇṇanā
46 第四经的注释中,“不随前际之见”是指不存在随顺前际的十八种见。“不随后际之见”是指不存在随顺后际的四十四种见。“强力执取”是指没有见的强力,也没有见的执取。到这里为止,显示的是第一道。现在,为了显示与观俱行的三道以及果,开始宣说“对于色”等。或者也可以说,那些见单凭观就能断除,但这里进一步开示,是为了显示与观俱行的四道。第四经解释完毕。巴利
46. Catutthe pubbantānudiṭṭhiyoti pubbantaṃ anugatā aṭṭhārasa diṭṭhiyo na honti. Aparantānudiṭṭhiyoti aparantaṃ anugatā catucattālīsa diṭṭhiyo na honti. Thāmaso parāmāsoti diṭṭhithāmaso ceva diṭṭhiparāmāso ca na hoti. Ettāvatā paṭhamamaggo dassito. Idāni saha vipassanāya tayo magge ca phalāni ca dassetuṃ rūpasmintiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā diṭṭhiyo nāma vipassanāya eva pahīnā, idaṃ pana upari saha vipassanāya cattāro magge dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Catutthaṃ.
第五部《随观经》的注释巴利
5. Samanupassanāsuttavaṇṇanā
47 第五项中,“观察五取蕴,或观察其中某一种”:这是以完整执取的方式观察五蕴,或以不完整执取的方式观察其中某一种。如此,这本身就是一种观察,也就是邪见的观察。对于有这种观察的人,“我是”的念头并没有消失——也就是说,在他那里,被称为渴爱、慢、见的三种戏论始终没有离去。所谓“五根的生起”:当这些烦恼生起时,以业和烦恼为条件,五根便产生了。巴利
47. Pañcame pañcupādānakkhandhe samanupassanti etesaṃ vā aññataranti paripuṇṇagāhavasena pañcakkhandhe samanupassanti, aparipuṇṇagāhavasena etesaṃ aññataraṃ. Iti ayañceva samanupassanāti iti ayañca diṭṭhisamanupassanā. Asmīti cassa avigataṃ hotīti yassa ayaṃ samanupassanā atthi, tasmiṃ asmīti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ papañcattayaṃ avigatameva hoti. Pañcannaṃindriyānaṃ avakkanti hotīti tasmiṃ kilesajāte sati kammakilesapaccayānaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ nibbatti hoti.
比丘们,所谓“有意”,这是针对业意而说的。“诸法”指所缘。“无明界”指速行刹那的无明。“由无明触所生”指从与无明相应的触所生起的。再者,“意”在有分刹那是指果报意界,在转向刹那是指唯作意界。“法”等的说明如前。“他会有‘我是’”指依渴爱、慢、见而有“我是”的想法。从此之后,“我是此”是指执取色等诸法中的某一法,以我见而说“这就是我”。“将有”是依常见而说。“将没有”是依断灭见而说。“将有色的”等等,这一切都归属于常见。“就在那时”指当这些根以那样的方式住立之时。无明被断除,指对四圣谛无知的无明被断除。明生起,指阿罗汉道之明生起。在这里,“我是”就是指渴爱、慢、见。业与五根之间有一个连接,把果报意归入五根一边,因此五根与业之间又有一个连接。这样,三种戏论属于过去世,诸根等属于现在世,其中以业意为起点,显示了未来世的缘。第五。巴利
Atthi, bhikkhave, manoti idaṃ kammamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dhammāti ārammaṇaṃ. Avijjādhātūti javanakkhaṇe avijjā. Avijjāsamphassajenāti avijjāsampayuttaphassato jātena. Apica manoti bhavaṅgakkhaṇe vipākamanodhātu, āvajjanakkhaṇe kiriyamanodhātu. Dhammādayo vuttappakārāva. Asmītipissa hotīti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena asmīti evampissa hoti. Ito paresu ayamahamasmīti rūpādīsu kiñcideva dhammaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ ahamasmī’’ti attadiṭṭhivasena vuttaṃ. Bhavissanti sassatadiṭṭhivasena. Na bhavissanti ucchedadiṭṭhivasena. Rūpī bhavissantiādīni sabbāni sassatameva bhajanti. Athetthāti atha tenevākārena ṭhitesu etesu indriyesu. Avijjā pahīyatīti catūsu saccesu aññāṇabhūtā avijjā pahīyati. Vijjā uppajjatīti arahattamaggavijjā uppajjati. Evamettha asmīti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo. Kammassa pañcannañca indriyānaṃ antare eko sandhi, vipākamanaṃ pañcindriyapakkhikaṃ katvā pañcannañca indriyānaṃ kammassa ca antare eko sandhīti. Iti tayo papañcā atīto addhā, indriyādīni paccuppanno addhā, tattha kammamanaṃ ādiṃ katvā anāgatassa paccayo dassitoti. Pañcamaṃ.
《蕴经》的注释巴利
6. Khandhasuttavaṇṇanā
48 第六项:色蕴属于欲界,其余四蕴通于四地。有漏,是指作为诸漏的所缘而成为它们的缘。取著,同样是指作为诸取的所缘而成为它们的缘。这里的字面意思是:与那些以它为所缘而生起的漏一起运作,所以叫有漏;可以被执取,所以叫取著。在这里,色蕴仍然属于欲界,其余诸蕴则是从观行的角度说的三地法。这样一来,这里的色法以聚集之义归入诸蕴,以有漏聚集之义归入诸取蕴。受等诸法既有有漏的,也有无漏的。它们全部以聚集之义归入诸蕴,而其中属于三地范围的部分,则以有漏之义归入诸取蕴。第六项。巴利
48. Chaṭṭhe rūpakkhandho kāmāvacaro, cattāro khandhā catubhūmakā. Sāsavanti āsavānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena paccayabhūtaṃ. Upādāniyanti tatheva ca upādānānaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ. Vacanattho panettha – ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattehi saha āsavehīti sāsavaṃ. Upādātabbanti upādāniyaṃ. Idhāpi rūpakkhandho kāmāvacaro, avasesā tebhūmakā vipassanācāravasena vuttā. Evamettha rūpaṃ rāsaṭṭhena khandhesu paviṭṭhaṃ, sāsavarāsaṭṭhena upādānakkhandhesu. Vedanādayo sāsavāpi atthi, anāsavāpi atthi. Te rāsaṭṭhena sabbepi khandhesu paviṭṭhā, tebhūmakā panettha sāsavaṭṭhena upādānakkhandhesu paviṭṭhāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《首那经》等经的注释巴利
7-8. Soṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
49-50 49-50. 在第七项中,“我更为殊胜”意思是:我是更殊胜、最上等的。“除了不如实见之外,还会是什么?”意思是:除了不如实见之外,还会有什么呢?不见,就是无明。这时,为了向他开示那回转的金刚破斥教法,开始说:“首那,你对此怎么想?”等等。第八项意思很清楚。这是第七、第八项。巴利
49-50. Sattame seyyohamasmīti visiṭṭho uttamo ahamasmi. Kimaññatra yathābhūtassa adassanāti yathābhūtassa adassanato aññaṃ kiṃ bhaveyya? Adassanaṃ aññāṇameva bhaveyyāti attho. Idānissa te parivaṭṭaṃ vajirabhedadesanaṃ ārabhanto taṃ kiṃ maññasi soṇotiādimāha. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānameva. Sattamaaṭṭhamāni.
《喜尽经》等经的注释巴利
9-10. Nandikkhayasuttādivaṇṇanā
51-52 第九和第十项中说的“由喜尽而贪尽,由贪尽而喜尽”,是因为“喜”和“贪”这两个词在含义上没有区别才这样说的。或者也可以说:以厌离随观而厌离的人,舍断喜;以离欲随观而离染的人,舍断贪。到这里,观已经完成,接着把“由贪尽而喜尽”作为道显示出来,再把“由喜贪尽而心解脱”作为果显示出来。这是第九和第十项。巴利
51-52. Navamadasamesu nandikkhayā rāgakkhayo, rāgakkhayā nandikkhayoti idaṃ nandīti vā rāgoti vā imesaṃ atthato ninnānākaraṇatāya vuttaṃ. Nibbidānupassanāya vā nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati, virāgānupassanāya virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati. Ettāvatā vipassanaṃ niṭṭhapetvā ‘‘rāgakkhayā nandikkhayo’’ti idha maggaṃ dassetvā ‘‘nandirāgakkhayā cittaṃ vimutta’’nti phalaṃ dassitanti. Navamadasamāni.
《取著经》的注释巴利
1. Upayasuttavaṇṇanā
53 53. 在《执取品》的第一经中,“执取”是指以渴爱、慢、邪见之力而依附于五蕴。“识”是指业识。“应达到”是指令业运转之后,由于具有牵引结生的能力,而达到增长等。“执取之识”一词未加解释,其原因前面已经说过。“所缘断绝”是指由于不再具有牵引结生的能力,所缘便断绝。“识的住著”是指业识没有住著。“那无住著者”是指那无住著的状态。“不造作而解脱”是指不造作结生而解脱。第一。巴利
53. Upayavaggassa paṭhame upayoti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena pañcakkhandhe upagato. Viññāṇanti kammaviññāṇaṃ. Āpajjeyyāti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya vuddhiādīni āpajjeyya. Viññāṇupayanti padassa aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Vocchijjatārammaṇanti paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya abhāvena ārammaṇaṃ vocchijjati. Patiṭṭhā viññāṇassāti kammaviññāṇassa patiṭṭhā na hoti. Tadappatiṭṭhitanti taṃ appatiṭṭhitaṃ. Anabhisaṅkhacca vimuttanti paṭisandhiṃ anabhisaṅkharitvā vimuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ.
第2篇《种子经》的注释巴利
2. Bījasuttavaṇṇanā
54 第五十四段:在第二部经里,“种子类”指的就是种子。“根种子”包括菖蒲、菖蒲根、姜黄、生姜这一类。“茎种子”包括无花果树、榕树这一类。“果种子”包括甘蔗、竹子、芦苇这一类。“枝种子”包括羊蹄草、薄荷这一类。“子种子”包括稻、麦等早季谷物,以及绿豆、蚕豆等晚季谷物。“完整的”指没有破裂。种子一旦破裂,就不能再当种子用了。“不腐坏的”指没有被水泡坏。因为腐坏的种子不能再当种子用。“没有被风吹日晒损坏的”指没有被风和烈日破坏,没有失去生机。因为失去生机而干瘪的种子不能再当种子用。“有坚实内核的”指内核完好、坚实。因为没有内核的种子不能再当种子用。“妥善存放的”指像在仓库里放了四个月那样,安安稳稳地存着。“地”指下方作为支撑的大地。“水”指上方滋润的水分。“四种识住”指作为业识所缘的色等四蕴。它们因为是识所缘的依托之处,所以像地界一样。“喜贪”因为有滋润的作用,所以像水界一样。“有滋润的识”指有因有缘的业识。就像种子在大地里生长一样,这个识也在作为所缘的“地”上生长。第二部经。巴利
54. Dutiye bījajātānīti bījāni. Mūlabījanti vacaṃ vacattaṃ haliddaṃ siṅgiveranti evamādi. Khandhabījanti assattho nigrodhoti evamādi. Phalubījanti ucchu veḷu naḷoti evamādi. Aggabījanti ajjukaṃ phaṇijjakanti evamādi. Bījabījanti sālivīhiādi pubbaṇṇañceva muggamāsādi aparaṇṇañca. Akhaṇḍānīti abhinnāni. Bhinnakālato paṭṭhāya bījaṃ bījatthāya na upakappati. Apūtikānīti udakatemanena apūtikāni. Pūtibījañhi bījatthāya na upakappati. Avātātapahatānīti vātena ca ātapena ca na hatāni, nirojataṃ na pāpitāni. Nirojañhi kasaṭaṃ bījaṃ bījatthāya na upakappati. Sārādānīti gahitasārāni patiṭṭhitasārāni. Nissārañhi bījaṃ bījatthāya na upakappati. Sukhasayitānīti cattāro māse koṭṭhe pakkhittaniyāmeneva sukhaṃ sayitāni. Pathavīti heṭṭhā patiṭṭhānapathavī. Āpoti uparisnehanaāpo. Catasso viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti kammaviññāṇassa ārammaṇabhūtā rūpādayo cattāro khandhā. Te hi ārammaṇavasena patiṭṭhābhūtattā pathavīdhātusadisā. Nandirāgo sinehanaṭṭhena āpodhātusadiso. Viññāṇaṃ sāhāranti sappaccayaṃ kammaviññāṇaṃ. Tañhi bījaṃ viya pathaviyaṃ ārammaṇapathaviyaṃ viruhati. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《自说经》的注释巴利
3. Udānasuttavaṇṇanā
55 在第三部经里,“说出优陀那”是指说出由强烈喜悦引发的感叹。那么,世尊这种感叹是由什么引起的呢?是因为教法具有能引导人出离的特性。怎么回事呢?据说,他当时这样想:“有三种亲依止缘:布施亲依止缘、持戒亲依止缘和修行亲依止缘。”其中,布施和持戒这两种亲依止缘比较弱,修行的亲依止缘则很强。依靠布施和持戒的亲依止缘,能证得三种道和果;而依靠修行的亲依止缘,则能证得阿罗汉果。就这样,安住在较弱亲依止缘上的比丘,努力精进,断除了五下分结,证得三种道果。当他这样审察——“啊,这教法真是能引导人出离的!”——时,这个优陀那就生起了。巴利
55. Tatiye udānaṃ udānesīti balavasomanassasamuṭṭhānaṃ udānaṃ udāhari. Kiṃ nissāya panesa bhagavato uppannoti. Sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ. Kathaṃ? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi, ‘‘tayome upanissayā – dānūpanissayo sīlūpanissayo bhāvanūpanissayo cā’’ti. Tesu dānasīlūpanissayā dubbalā, bhāvanūpanissayo balavā. Dānasīlūpanissayā hi tayo magge ca phalāni ca pāpenti, bhāvanūpanissayo arahattaṃ pāpeti. Iti dubbalūpanissaye patiṭṭhito bhikkhu ghaṭento vāyamanto pañcorambhāgiyāni bandhanāni chetvā tīṇi maggaphalāni nibbatteti, ‘‘aho sāsanaṃ niyyānika’’nti āvajjentassa ayaṃ udapādi.
在这里,为了说明“安住在微弱的亲依止缘上,努力精进,就能证得三种道果”这个道理,应当知道弥拉迦长老的事迹。据说他在家人时,以杀生为生,在树林里布下了上百个套索和上百个陷阱。有一天,他吃了炭火烤的肉以后,去巡视设套索的地方,被口渴逼得受不了,就走到一位住在林中的长老的精舍,长老正在经行,附近放着一个水罐,他打开一看,连沾湿手掌那么一点水都没有。他生气了,说:“比丘啊比丘,你们吃了在家人供养的东西,吃得饱饱的,睡得香香的,水罐里却连一捧水都不肯留,这太不像话了!”长老心想:“我明明把水罐装满放好了,这是怎么回事?”走过去一看,水罐是满的,就舀了一贝壳水给他。他喝了两三贝壳的水,心里想:“这样一个装满的水罐,竟然因为我的业力变得像烧红的铁盘一样。那将来投生到下一世,又会变成什么样呢?”他心里生起极大的警惧,扔掉弓,说:“尊者,请让我出家吧。”长老给他讲了发、爪、齿、皮、肉这五种业处,就让他出家了。巴利
Tattha ‘‘dubbalūpanissaye ṭhatvā ghaṭamāno tīṇi maggaphalāni pāpuṇātī’’ti imassatthassāvibhāvanatthaṃ milakattherassa vatthu veditabbaṃ – so kira gihikāle pāṇātipātakammena jīvikaṃ kappento araññe pāsasatañceva adūhalasatañca yojesi. Athekadivasaṃ aṅgārapakkamaṃsaṃ khāditvā pāsaṭṭhānesu vicaranto pipāsābhibhūto ekassa araññavāsittherassa vihāraṃ gantvā therassa caṅkamantassa avidūre ṭhitaṃ pānīyaghaṭaṃ vivari, hatthatemanamattampi udakaṃ nāddasa. So kujjhitvā āha – ‘‘bhikkhu, bhikkhu tumhe gahapatikehi dinnaṃ bhuñjitvā bhuñjitvā supatha, pānīyaghaṭe añjalimattampi udakaṃ na ṭhapetha, na yuttameta’’nti. Thero ‘‘mayā pānīyaghaṭo pūretvā ṭhapito, kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti? Gantvā olokento paripuṇṇaghaṭaṃ disvā pānīyasaṅkhaṃ pūretvā adāsi. So dvattisaṅkhapūraṃ pivitvā cintesi – ‘‘evaṃ pūritaghaṭo nāma mama kammaṃ āgamma tattakapālo viya jāto. Kiṃ nu kho anāgate attabhāve bhavissatī’’ti? Saṃviggacitto dhanuṃ chaḍḍetvā, ‘‘pabbājetha maṃ, bhante’’ti āha. Thero tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitvā taṃ pabbājesi.
他修沙门法的时候,过去杀死许多鹿和猪的地方,还有布置套索、陷阱的地方,总是浮现在眼前。他一回想这些,身体就发热,心也像劣牛一样,连业处都走不上正轨。他被不满逼迫,心想:“我这样当比丘还能做什么?”于是走到长老那里,顶礼后说:“尊者,我没法修沙门法了。”长老就对他说:“那你去做些手工活吧。”他说:“好的,尊者。”于是砍下乌敦跋罗树等生木,堆成一大垛,然后问:“现在做什么?”长老说:“烧掉。”他在四个方向点了火,却烧不起来,就说:“尊者,我烧不着。”长老说:“那你让开。”长老把大地劈成两半,从无间地狱取出一团萤火虫那么大的火,投进木垛里。那一大堆木头,瞬间就像干树叶一样烧光了。这时长老又让他看见无间地狱,让他生起悚惧,说:“你要是还俗,就会在那里受苦。”他从见到无间地狱那一刻起就浑身发抖,问:“尊者,佛陀教法是能导出的吗?”长老说:“是的,贤友。”他又说:“尊者,既然佛陀教法是能导出的,弥拉迦一定能自我解脱,尊者不必担心。”从那时起,他就努力修沙门法,精勤用功,圆满应尽的职责。昏沉睡意压来时,他就把浸湿的稻草放在头上,把脚伸进水槽里,坐着修行。有一天,他滤好了水,把水罐放在大腿上,等着水瓮的水断流。这时,长老给沙弥说了这个总说——巴利
Tassa samaṇadhammaṃ karontassa bahūnaṃ migasūkarānaṃ māritaṭṭhānaṃ pāsaadūhalānañca yojitaṭṭhānaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ anussarato sarīre dāho uppajjati, kūṭagoṇo viya kammaṭṭhānampi vīthiṃ na paṭipajjati. So ‘‘kiṃ karissāmi bhikkhubhāvenā’’ti ? Anabhiratiyā pīḷito therassa santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā āha – ‘‘na sakkomi, bhante, samaṇadhammaṃ kātu’’nti. Atha naṃ thero ‘‘hatthakammaṃ karohī’’ti āha. So ‘‘sādhu, bhante’’ti vatvā udumbarādayo allarukkhe chinditvā mahantaṃ rāsiṃ katvā, ‘‘idāni kiṃ karomī’’ti pucchi? Jhāpehi nanti. So catūsu disāsu aggiṃ datvā jhāpetuṃ asakkonto, ‘‘bhante, na sakkomī’’ti āha. Thero ‘‘tena hi apehī’’ti pathaviṃ dvidhā katvā avīcito khajjopanakamattaṃ aggiṃ nīharitvā tattha pakkhipi. So tāva mahantaṃ rāsiṃ sukkhapaṇṇaṃ viya khaṇena jhāpesi. Athassa thero avīciṃ dassetvā, ‘‘sace vibbhamissasi, ettha paccissasī’’ti saṃvegaṃ janesi. So avīcidassanato paṭṭhāya pavedhamāno ‘‘niyyānikaṃ, bhante, buddhasāsana’’nti pucchi, āmāvusoti. Bhante, buddhasāsanassa niyyānikatte sati milako attamokkhaṃ karissati, mā cintayitthāti. Tato paṭṭhāya samaṇadhammaṃ karoti ghaṭeti, tassa vattapaṭivattaṃ pūreti, niddāya bādhayamānāya tintaṃ palālaṃ sīse ṭhapetvā pāde soṇḍiyaṃ otāretvā nisīdati. So ekadivasaṃ pānīyaṃ parissāvetvā ghaṭaṃ ūrumhi ṭhapetvā udakamaṇikānaṃ pacchedaṃ āgamayamāno aṭṭhāsi. Atha kho thero sāmaṇerassa imaṃ uddesaṃ deti –
精进持戒、具足正念的人,
行为清净、做事之前先仔细观察的人,
对于能自我克制、依正法而生活的人,
不放逸的人,名声会不断增长。巴利
‘‘Uṭṭhānavato satīmato, Sucikammassa nisammakārino; Saññatassa dhammajīvino, Appamattassa yasobhivaḍḍhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 24);
他把这四句偈也拿来对照自己:“精勤的人应该像我这样,有正念的人也应该像我这样……不放逸的人也应该像我这样。”他这样把偈颂对照自身之后,就在那同一个词句的当下,断除了五下分结,安住在不来果中,欢喜雀跃——巴利
So catuppadikampi taṃ gāthaṃ attaniyeva upanesi – ‘‘uṭṭhānavatā nāma mādisena bhavitabbaṃ. Satimatāpi mādiseneva…pe… appamattenapi mādiseneva bhavitabba’’nti. Evaṃ taṃ gāthaṃ attani upanetvā tasmiṃyeva padavāre ṭhito pañcorambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni chinditvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāya haṭṭhatuṭṭho –
我头顶着一捆湿草,来回经行;
我已经到达第三阶位,对此我没有任何疑惑。巴利
‘‘Allaṃ palālapuñjāhaṃ, sīsenādāya caṅkamiṃ; Pattosmi tatiyaṃ ṭhānaṃ, ettha me natthi saṃsayo’’ti. –
他说了这首自说偈。这样,安住在微弱的依止缘上,精勤努力,就能断除五下分结,证得三种道果。因此世尊说:“我不存在,我也不应存在;过去不存在,未来也不会存在——这样决意的比丘,就能断除下分结。”巴利
Imaṃ udānagāthaṃ āha. Evaṃ dubbalūpanissaye ṭhito ghaṭento vāyamanto pañcorambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni chinditvā tīṇi maggaphalāni nibbatteti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘no cassaṃ, no ca me siyā, nābhavissa, na me bhavissatīti evaṃ adhimuccamāno bhikkhu chindeyya orambhāgiyāni saṃyojanānī’’ti.
在这里,“我本不存在,我的也不存在”是说:如果我不存在,我的生活资具也不会存在。或者说,如果我过去没有造作过业行,那么现在这个五蕴也不会存在。“过去不存在,未来也不会存在”是说:现在我要这样努力,让未来不再有能产生五蕴的业行;如果没有这个业行,未来就不会有我的结生。这样决意,就是说:这样决意的比丘,安住在微弱的依止缘上,就能断除五下分结。“这样说”是指:世尊思惟教法能导向出离,而在这篇自说中这样宣说。“色将灭坏”就是色将会坏灭。“色的灭坏”是指以坏灭的观见与观智相应,因为四种道与色等的坏灭见相应,所以这样说。尊者,这样决意的比丘能断除,是说:尊者,这样决意的比丘必定能断除五下分结。为什么不能断除呢?巴利
Tattha no cassaṃ, no ca me siyāti sace ahaṃ na bhaveyyaṃ, mama parikkhāropi na bhaveyya. Sace vā pana me atīte kammābhisaṅkhāro nābhavissa, idaṃ me etarahi khandhapañcakaṃ na bhaveyya. Nābhavissa, na me bhavissatīti idāni pana tathā parakkamissāmi, yathā me āyatiṃ khandhābhinibbattako kammasaṅkhāro na bhavissati, tasmiṃ asati āyatiṃ paṭisandhi nāma na me bhavissati. Evaṃ adhimuccamānoti evaṃ adhimuccanto bhikkhu dubbalūpanissaye ṭhito pañcorambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni chindeyya. Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ āvajjentena bhagavatā imasmiṃ udāne vutte. Rūpaṃ vibhavissatīti rūpaṃ bhijjissati. Rūpassa vibhavāti vibhavadassanena sahavipassanena. Sahavipassanakā hi cattāro maggā rūpādīnaṃ vibhavadassanaṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ adhimuccamāno, bhante, bhikkhu chindeyyāti, bhante, evaṃ adhimuccamāno bhikkhu chindeyyeva pañcorambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni. Kasmā na chindissatīti?
现在,为了询问更上的道与果,说了“尊者,那么是怎样的呢”等话。其中,“无间”有两种:近无间和远无间。观对道来说是近无间,对果来说是远无间。针对这一点,他问:“尊者,怎样知、怎样见,才能在观之后无间地生起名为‘漏尽’的阿拉汉果?” “于不应恐惧之处”就是在不应恐惧、不应害怕的情况下。“产生恐惧”就是生起恐惧。这里的“恐惧”是指:那种以“我本不存在,我的也不存在”这样的方式生起的微弱观,因为无法断尽对自我的贪爱,所以对未闻法的凡夫来说,才成为恐惧。因为他看到“现在我将被断灭,从此将什么都不存在”,就像某个婆罗门看到自己坠入悬崖一样。据说,在铜殿下面,三藏小那伽长老正在转说被三相所击触的法。那时,有一个婆罗门站在一边听法,诸行以空的方式呈现在他面前。他就像坠入悬崖一样,从敞开的门逃出去,跑回家中,让儿子睡在胸口,说道:“孩子,我忆念释迦教法时,心迷失了。” “这位比丘没有恐惧”是指:这样生起的强力观,对已闻法的圣弟子来说,不成为恐惧。因为他不会这样想:“我将被断灭”或“我将毁灭。”而是这样:只是诸行生起,只是诸行灭去。第三。巴利
Idāni upari maggaphalaṃ pucchanto kathaṃ pana, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha anantarāti dve anantarāni āsannānantarañca dūrānantarañca. Vipassanā maggassa āsannānantaraṃ nāma, phalassa dūrānantaraṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘kathaṃ pana, bhante, jānato kathaṃ passato vipassanānantarā ‘āsavānaṃ khayo’ti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ arahattaphalaṃ hotī’’ti pucchati. Atasitāyeti atasitabbe abhāyitabbe ṭhānamhi. Tāsaṃ āpajjatīti bhayaṃ āpajjati. Tāso hesoti yā esā ‘‘no cassaṃ, no ca me siyā’’ti evaṃ pavattā dubbalavipassanā, sā yasmā attasinehaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti, tasmā assutavato puthujjanassa tāso nāma hoti. So hi ‘‘idānāhaṃ ucchijjissāmi, na dāni kiñci bhavissāmī’’ti attānaṃ papāte patantaṃ viya passati aññataro brāhmaṇo viya. Lohapāsādassa kira heṭṭhā tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero tilakkhaṇāhataṃ dhammaṃ parivatteti. Atha aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa ekamante ṭhatvā dhammaṃ suṇantassa saṅkhārā suññato upaṭṭhahiṃsu. So papāte patanto viya hutvā vivaṭadvārena tato palāyitvā gehaṃ pavisitvā, puttaṃ ure sayāpetvā, ‘‘tāta, sakyasamayaṃ āvajjento manamhi naṭṭho’’ti āha. Na heso bhikkhu tāsoti esā evaṃ pavattā balavavipassanā sutavato ariyasāvakassa na tāso nāma hoti. Na hi tassa evaṃ hoti ‘‘ahaṃ ucchijjissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘vinassissāmī’’ti vāti. Evaṃ pana hoti ‘‘saṅkhārāva uppajjanti, saṅkhārāva nirujjhantī’’ti. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 《取转经》注释巴利
4. Upādānaparipavattasuttavaṇṇanā
56 56. 在第四经中,“四转”是指对每一个蕴,从四种转起的方式。“了知色”意思是:我了知色是苦谛。同样地,一切词句的意义都应依四谛来理解。“由食集起”,在这里,伴有欲贪的抟食叫作食。“已行道者”,即从持戒开始,直至阿拉汉道的行道者。“住立”意指安立。至此,有学地已解说完毕。接下来为了解说无学地,而说“诸比丘,凡……者”等。“善解脱”即由阿拉汉果而彻底解脱。“究竟者”指已圆满完成一切应作之事的人。他们已没有可被施设的轮转——不再有任何剩余的轮转可被施设;或者,“轮转”指原因,即没有可被施设的原因。至此,已说无学地之章节。第四。巴利
56. Catutthe catuparivaṭṭanti ekekasmiṃ khandhe catunnaṃ parivaṭṭanavasena. Rūpaṃ abbhaññāsinti rūpaṃ dukkhasaccanti abhiññāsiṃ. Evaṃ sabbapadesu catusaccavaseneva attho veditabbo. Āhārasamudayāti ettha sacchandarāgo kabaḷīkārāhāro āhāro nāma. Paṭipannāti sīlato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā paṭipannā honti. Gādhantīti patiṭṭhahanti. Ettāvatā sekkhabhūmiṃ kathetvā idāni asekkhabhūmiṃ kathento ye ca kho keci, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Suvimuttāti arahattaphalavimuttiyā suṭṭhu vimuttā. Kevalinoti sakalino katasabbakiccā. Vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ natthi paññāpanāyāti yena te avasiṭṭhena vaṭṭena paññāpeyyuṃ, taṃ nesaṃ vaṭṭaṃ natthi paññāpanāya. Atha vā vaṭṭanti kāraṇaṃ, paññāpanāya kāraṇaṃ natthīti. Ettāvatā asekkhabhūmivāro kathito. Catutthaṃ.
《七处经》的注释巴利
5. Sattaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
57 57. 在第五经中,“七处善巧者”是指在七个方面都很熟练。“已住者”是指已经完成修行而安住的人。“最上士”是指最殊胜的人。这里其余的内容,都应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。此外还应知道,这部经既能令诸漏尽者感到格外欢喜,也能吸引有学之人。就像一位国王在战争中获胜后,把得胜的勇士安置在高位,给他们荣誉。为什么呢?因为其他人看到这些人得到荣誉,就会想:我们也要成为勇士。同样,世尊在不可计量的漫长时间里圆满了诸波罗蜜,在菩提树下战胜了烦恼魔,证得一切知智之后,坐在舍卫城的祇园精舍中宣说这部经时,把诸漏尽者提出来加以赞叹、称扬。为什么呢?因为这样,其余的有学之人就会想:阿拉汉果是可以证得的。因此应当知道,这部经由于提举赞扬诸漏尽者,所以能令欢喜;由于对有学之人起吸引作用,所以能令向往。巴利
57. Pañcame sattaṭṭhānakusaloti sattasu okāsesu cheko. Vusitavāti vusitavāso. Uttamapurisoti seṭṭhapuriso. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana suttaṃ ussadanandiyañceva palobhanīyañcāti veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi rājā vijitasaṅgāmo saṅgāme vijayino yodhe uccaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā tesaṃ sakkāraṃ karoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Etesaṃ sakkāraṃ disvā sesāpi sūrā bhavituṃ maññissantīti, evameva bhagavā appameyyaṃ kālaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā mahābodhimaṇḍe kilesamāravijayaṃ katvā sabbaññutaṃ patto sāvatthiyaṃ jetavanamahāvihāre nisīditvā imaṃ suttaṃ desento khīṇāsave ukkhipitvā thomesi vaṇṇesi. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Evaṃ avasesā sekkhapuggalā arahattaphalaṃ pattabbaṃ maññissantīti. Evametaṃ suttaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ ukkhipitvā pasaṃsitattā ussadanandiyaṃ, sekkhānaṃ palobhitattā palobhanīyanti veditabbaṃ.
“比丘们,比丘就这样成为七处善巧者。”到这里,虽然已经按回顾道与果的方式讲完了法,但接下来为了说明“比丘们,比丘又如何是三种审察者”,也就是要显示漏尽者“他恒常以某种所缘而安住,那并不是有情,也不是人,而只是界等”,以及显示“在这些法上造了业,所以来到此处”的往生修行之道,才又这样说。其中,“依界审察”就是以界的本性来看、来观察。其余两句也是同样的道理。第五。巴利
Evaṃkho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sattaṭṭhānakusalo hotīti ettāvatā cettha maggaphalapaccavekkhaṇavasena desanaṃ niṭṭhapetvāpi puna kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tividhūpaparikkhī hotīti idaṃ ‘‘khīṇāsavo yasmiṃ ārammaṇe satatavihārena viharati, taṃ satto vā puggalo vā na hoti, dhātuādimattameva pana hotī’’ti evaṃ khīṇāsavassa satatavihārañca, ‘‘imesu dhammesu kammaṃ katvā ayaṃ āgato’’ti āgamanīyapaṭipadañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha dhātuso upaparikkhatīti dhātusabhāvena passati oloketi. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Pañcamaṃ.
第六部 正自觉者经的注释巴利
6. Sammāsambuddhasuttavaṇṇanā
58 第六经中,“有什么增上精勤”是指更进一步的努力。“未生起之道”:这条道,迦叶正自觉者曾令它生起,在此期间其他导师都没能令它生起,所以世尊被称为未生起之道的令生起者。在《城邑譬喻经》中,在荒废无人行经之处有古道出现;但在这里,是从一直不曾现行的意义上,才称为“未生起之道”。“未产生者”是它的同义词。“未宣说者”是指从未被宣说。“知道道”就是知“道”者。“使道被了知、显明”就是“道了知者”的意思。“于道与非道善巧”就是“道善巧者”。“随道而行者”是指追随此道而行的人。“随后成就者”意思是:我先到达,弟子们随后成就。第六经注释完毕。巴利
58. Chaṭṭhe ko adhippayāsoti ko adhikapayogo. Anuppannassāti imañhi maggaṃ kassapasammāsambuddho uppādesi, antarā añño satthā uppādetuṃ nāsakkhi, iti bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā nāma. Nagaropamasmiñhi avaḷañjanaṭṭhānesu purāṇamaggo jāto, idha avattamānaṭṭhena anuppannamaggo nāma. Asañjātassāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anakkhātassāti akathitassa. Maggaṃ jānātīti maggaññū. Maggaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ akāsīti maggavidū. Magge ca amagge ca kovidoti maggakovido. Maggānugāti maggaṃ anugacchantā. Pacchā samannāgatāti ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ gato, sāvakā pacchā samannāgatā. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《无我相经》义注巴利
7. Anattalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
59 第七经中,“五群比丘”指的是以阿若憍陈如长老为首的五位旧侍者。“召唤”:在阿沙荼月满月日,从转法轮开始,当他们依次证得入流果之后,世尊心想“现在我要为他们说法,令他们灭尽诸漏”,于是在半月第五日召唤了他们。“说了此”指他讲了这部从“诸比丘,色是无我”等开始的《无我相经》。其中,“无我”就是前面以四种理由所说的无我。“诸比丘,你们认为如何?”这一句为什么开始?应当知道:到这里为止只说了无我相,还没有说无常相和苦相,现在为了显示这两相,并把三相合在一起显示,所以从这里开始。“因此”是说,因为这五蕴是无常、苦、无我,所以……。“凡任何色……”等的详细解说,在《清净道论》修慧部分的蕴解说中已经讲过。其余部分,都应依照前面所说的来理解。而这部经中,特别只说了无我相。第七经注释完毕。巴利
59. Sattame pañcavaggiyeti aññāsi koṇḍaññattherādike pañca jane purāṇupaṭṭhāke. Āmantesīti āsāḷhipuṇṇamadivase dhammacakkappavattanato paṭṭhāya anukkamena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhite ‘‘idāni nesaṃ āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti pañcamiyaṃ pakkhassa āmantesi. Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, anattā’’tiādinayappavattaṃ anattalakkhaṇasuttaṃ avoca. Tattha anattāti pubbe vuttehi catūhi kāraṇehi anattā. Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhaveti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Ettakena ṭhānena anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ, na aniccadukkhalakkhaṇāni, idāni tāni dassetvā samodhānetvā tīṇipi lakkhaṇāni dassetuṃ idamāraddhanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā ime pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattā, tasmā. Yaṃkiñci rūpantiādīsu vitthārakathā visuddhimagge paññābhāvanādhikāre khandhaniddese vuttāva. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sutte anattalakkhaṇameva kathitanti. Sattamaṃ.
8. 《摩诃梨经》的注释巴利
8. Mahālisuttavaṇṇanā
60 在第八经中,“一向苦”等说法,和《界相应》里所讲的完全一样。第八经。巴利
60. Aṭṭhame ekantadukkhantiādīni dhātusaṃyutte vuttanayāneva. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第9篇《燃烧经》的注释巴利
9. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā
61 61. 第九经中,“燃烧的”是指被十一种火所燃烧、炽烈燃烧。因此,在这两部经里,都只讲了苦相。第九经结束。巴利
61. Navame ādittanti ekādasahi aggīhi ādittaṃ pajjalitaṃ. Iti dvīsupi imesu suttesu dukkhalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ. Navamaṃ.
第10经《言说道经》的注释巴利
10. Niruttipathasuttavaṇṇanā
62 在第十经里,释义本身就是释义的路径。或者也可以说,这些释义是借由言说而被人所知的种种意义的路径,所以叫释义路径。剩下两个词也应该这样理解。应当知道,这三个词其实是彼此的同义词。未被混杂的,意思是没有被丢弃,也就是没有人说“这些有什么用”,然后把它们扔掉。过去未被混杂的,是说在过去也从来没有被丢弃过。现在不被混杂的,是说如今也不会因为觉得“这些有什么用”而被丢掉。未来将不被混杂的,是说在未来也不会被丢掉。无过失的,意思是没有被排斥、没有被阻挡。过去的,是指已经超越了自己的本性,或者只是说它的坏灭状态已经过去了。已灭的,是指没有转移到别的地方,就在原地灭尽、平息了。已变易的,是指进入了变易的状态,消失了。未生的,是指还没有生起。未显现的,是指还没有显露出来。巴利
62.Dasame niruttiyova niruttipathā, atha vā niruttiyo ca tā niruttivasena viññātabbānaṃ atthānaṃ pathattā pathā cāti niruttipathā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tīṇipi cetāni aññamaññavevacanānevāti veditabbāni. Asaṃkiṇṇāti avijahitā, ‘‘ko imehi attho’’ti vatvā achaḍḍitā. Asaṃkiṇṇapubbāti atītepi na jahitapubbā. Na saṃkīyantīti etarahipi ‘‘kimetehī’’ti na chaḍḍīyanti. Na saṃkīyissantīti anāgatepi na chaḍḍīyissanti. Appaṭikuṭṭhāti appaṭibāhitā. Atītanti attano sabhāvaṃ bhaṅgameva vā atikkantaṃ. Niruddhanti desantaraṃ asaṅkamitvā tattheva niruddhaṃ vūpasantaṃ. Vipariṇatanti vipariṇāmaṃ gataṃ naṭṭhaṃ. Ajātanti anuppannaṃ. Apātubhūtanti apākaṭībhūtaṃ.
乌羯罗人,就是住在乌羯罗国的人。瓦萨巴尼亚,就是瓦萨和巴尼亚两人。他们两人都是持根本邪见的人。在“无因论”等说法中,由于他们执取“没有因,没有缘”,所以是无因论者;由于执取“造作者造恶,恶业并不成立”,所以是无业论者;由于执取“没有布施”等说法,所以是虚无论者。这里问:那里有两个人、三种见,难道每个人各得一种半吗?并非如此。就像一位比丘能依次证得四种禅那,同样应当知道,在这里那两个人各自都生起了三种见。当人反复作意、执取、欢喜、耽溺于“没有因,没有缘”时,这就如同见到正道一样。他因此堕入邪性决定,被称为纯黑者。正如对无因见一样,在“造作者造恶,恶业并不成立”“没有布施”等立场上,他也同样堕入邪性决定。巴利
Ukkalāti ukkalajanapadavāsino. Vassabhaññāti vasso ca bhañño ca. Dvepi hi te mūladiṭṭhigatikā. Ahetukavādātiādīsu ‘‘natthi hetu natthi paccayo’’ti gahitattā ahetukavādā. ‘‘Karoto na karīyati pāpa’’nti gahitattā akiriyavādā. ‘‘Natthi dinna’’ntiādigahaṇato natthikavādā. Tattha ime dve janā, tisso diṭṭhiyo, kiṃ ekekassa diyaḍḍhā hotīti? Na tathā, yathā pana eko bhikkhu paṭipāṭiyā cattāripi jhānāni nibbatteti , evamettha ekeko tissopi diṭṭhiyo nibbattesīti veditabbo. ‘‘Natthi hetu natthi paccayo’’ti punappunaṃ āvajjentassa āharantassa abhinandantassa assādentassa maggadassanaṃ viya hoti. So micchattaniyāmaṃ okkamati, so ekantakāḷakoti vuccati. Yathā pana ahetukadiṭṭhiyaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpaṃ, natthi dinna’’nti imesupi ṭhānesu micchattaniyāmaṃ okkamati.
他们不认为该受呵责、该受驳斥。在这里,如果有人说:“所谓过去,并不是过去,而是未来或现在”,这就是在呵责。指出其中的过失后,又说:“呵责这个有什么用?”这就是在驳斥。然而,即使那些极端的黑暗邪见者,也认为这些言说路径是不应受呵责、不应受驳斥的。他们讲过去就只是过去,讲未来就只是未来,讲现在就只是现在。因为害怕智者的呵责、攻击、指责和追究。这样,在这部经中,宣说了四地诸蕴的施设。第十。巴利
Na garahitabbaṃ nappaṭikkositabbaṃ amaññiṃsūti ettha ‘‘yadetaṃ atītaṃ nāma, nayidaṃ atītaṃ, idamassa anāgataṃ vā paccuppannaṃ vā’’ti vadanto garahati nāma. Tattha dosaṃ dassetvā ‘‘kiṃ iminā garahitenā’’ti? Vadanto paṭikkosati nāma. Ime pana niruttipathe tepi accantakāḷakā diṭṭhigatikā na garahitabbe na paṭikkositabbe maññiṃsu. Atītaṃ pana atītameva, anāgataṃ anāgatameva, paccuppannaṃ paccuppannameva kathayiṃsu. Nindāghaṭṭanabyārosaupārambhabhayāti viññūnaṃ santikā nindābhayena ca ghaṭṭanabhayena ca dosāropanabhayena ca upārambhabhayena ca. Iti imasmiṃ sutte catubhūmikakhandhānaṃ paṇṇatti kathitāti. Dasamaṃ.
第七 阿罗汉品巴利
7. Arahantavaggo
《执取经》的注释巴利
1. Upādiyamānasuttavaṇṇanā
63 63. 在阿拉汉品的第一经中,“执取时”是指以渴爱、慢和见的方式执取。“被魔罗束缚”是指被魔罗的套索束缚。“从魔罗解脱”是指从魔罗的套索中解脱。第一。巴利
63. Arahantavaggassa paṭhame upādiyamānoti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena gaṇhamāno. Baddho mārassāti mārassa pāsena baddho nāma. Mutto pāpimatoti pāpimato pāsena mutto nāma hoti. Paṭhamaṃ.
《思量经》的注释巴利
2. Maññamānasuttavaṇṇanā
64 在第二经中,“思量”是指以渴爱、慢、见的思量方式去思量。第二。巴利
64. Dutiye maññamānoti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhimaññanāhi maññamāno. Dutiyaṃ.
《欢喜经》的注释巴利
3. Abhinandamānasuttavaṇṇanā
65 在第三经中,“欢喜”是指以渴爱、慢、邪见这三种欢喜而欢喜。第三经。巴利
65. Tatiye abhinandamānoti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiabhinandanāhiyeva abhinandamāno. Tatiyaṃ.
《无常经》等经的注释巴利
4-5. Aniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
66-68 第四经里的“欲”,指的是渴爱之欲。第五经和第六经也是同样的说法。第四经等几部经的注释到此结束。巴利
66-68. Catutthe chandoti taṇhāchando. Pañcamachaṭṭhesupi eseva nayo. Catutthādīni.
第7节 关于《非我所经》的注释巴利
7. Anattaniyasuttavaṇṇanā
69 第七经中,“非我所”是指不属于自己的东西,也就是以“属于自己的资具”这种方式来看是空的。这是它的含义。第七。巴利
69. Sattame anattaniyanti na attano santakaṃ, attano parikkhārabhāvena suññatanti attho. Sattamaṃ.
第8至10经《可染住经》等的注释巴利
8-10. Rajanīyasaṇṭhitasuttādivaṇṇanā
70-72 第八经里说的“住于可染”是指以能让人起染着的样貌而安住,意思是作为贪生起的条件而存在。第九经和第十经,应当依照《罗睺罗相应》里已经讲过的方式来理解。第八经等。巴利
70-72. Aṭṭhame rajanīyasaṇṭhitanti rajanīyena ākārena saṇṭhitaṃ, rāgassa paccayabhāvena ṭhitanti attho. Navamadasamāni rāhulasaṃyutte vuttanayeneva veditabbānīti. Aṭṭhamādīni.
第8品 所食品巴利
8. Khajjanīyavaggo
1-3. 《味经》等经的注释巴利
1-3. Assādasuttādivaṇṇanā
73-75 73-75. 在《可嚼食者品》开头的前三部经里,只讲了四圣谛。这是第一部经等。巴利
73-75. Khajjanīyavaggassa ādito tīsu suttesu catusaccameva kathitaṃ. Paṭhamādīni.
第4经《阿拉汉经》的注释巴利
4. Arahantasuttavaṇṇanā
76 76. 在第四经中,“诸比丘,凡诸有情居”是说:诸比丘,凡是叫做有情居的,有多少存在。“乃至有顶”是说:凡是叫做有顶的,有多少存在。“这些是最上,这些是最胜”是说:这些既是最上的,也是最胜的。“即所谓阿拉汉”是说:这些就是那些阿拉汉。这部经同样应当依照前面的方式,理解为是为了舍离对殊胜定境的贪爱,以及舍离那些能引生贪染的对象。巴利
76. Catutthe yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattāvāsāti, bhikkhave, yattakā sattāvāsā nāma atthi. Yāvatā bhavagganti yattakaṃ bhavaggaṃ nāma atthi. Ete aggā ete seṭṭhāti ete aggabhūtā ceva seṭṭhabhūtā ca. Yadidaṃ arahantoti ye ime arahanto nāma. Idampi suttaṃ purimanayeneva ussadanandiyañca palobhanīyañcāti veditabbaṃ.
接着,世尊又用这些偈颂来说这段话——“阿拉汉确实快乐”等等,这些偈颂既阐明了这段话的含义,也阐明了它特别的意义。其中,“快乐”是指他们因为禅那的快乐、道的快乐和果的快乐而快乐。“他们没有渴爱”是指对他们来说,能导致恶趣之苦的渴爱不被舍弃。这样一来,他们因为没有以渴爱为根的苦,所以确实是快乐的。“我慢已被彻底断除”是指九种我慢已经被阿拉汉道彻底断除。“愚痴之网已被破开”是指以智慧破开了无明之网。巴利
Athāparaṃ etadavocāti tadatthaparidīpanāhi ceva visesatthaparidīpanāhi ca gāthāhi etaṃ ‘‘sukhino vata arahanto’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha sukhinoti jhānasukhena maggasukhena phalasukhena ca sukhitā. Taṇhā tesaṃ na vijjatīti tesaṃ apāyadukkhajanikā taṇhā na vajjati. Evaṃ te imassapi taṇhāmūlakassa abhāvena sukhitāva. Asmimāno samucchinnoti navavidho asmimāno arahattamaggena samucchinno. Mohajālaṃ padālitanti ñāṇena avijjājālaṃ phālitaṃ.
无贪欲:是指断除了名为“贪欲”的渴爱,也就是阿罗汉果。无污染:是指不被渴爱和邪见的污垢所染。成为梵天:是指成为最殊胜者。依遍知:是指以三种遍知彻底了知。以七正法为行境:信、惭、愧、多闻、已发起精进、正念现前、慧,这七种正法就是他们的行境,所以称为以七正法为行境。巴利
Anejanti ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya pahānabhūtaṃ arahattaṃ. Anupalittāti taṇhādiṭṭhilepehi alittā. Brahmabhūtāti seṭṭhabhūtā. Pariññāyāti tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Sattasaddhammagocarāti saddhā hirī ottappaṃ bāhusaccaṃ āraddhavīriyatā upaṭṭhitassatitā paññāti ime satta saddhammā gocaro etesanti sattasaddhammagocarā.
具足七宝,就是具足七种觉支宝。到处游历,意思是世间的普通人也会到处游历。但在这里,指的是漏尽者们没有顾虑的游走。所以接着说“已断除怖畏恐惧”。其中,怖就是恐惧,畏是强烈的恐惧。具足十支,就是具足十种无学支。大象战士,依四种原因称为大象战士。已得定者,就是通过近行定和安止定而得定。他们没有渴爱,正如世尊对大王所说:“大王,世间不知足、不满足,是渴爱的奴隶。”(《中部》2.305)像这样能让人成为奴隶的渴爱,在他们那里也不存在。以此显示漏尽者已经获得自由、不再是奴隶的状态。巴利
Sattaratanasampannāti sattahi bojjhaṅgaratanehi samannāgatā. Anuvicarantīti lokiyamahājanāpi anuvicarantiyeva. Idha pana khīṇāsavānaṃ nirāsaṅkacāro nāma gahito. Tenevāha ‘‘pahīnabhayabheravā’’ti. Tattha bhayaṃ bhayameva, bheravaṃ balavabhayaṃ. Dasahaṅgehi sampannāti asekkhehi dasahi aṅgehi samannāgatā. Mahānāgāti catūhi kāraṇehi mahānāgā. Samāhitāti upacārappanāhi samāhitā. Taṇhā tesaṃ na vijjatīti ‘‘ūno loko atitto taṇhādāsoti kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.305) evaṃ vuttā dāsakārikā taṇhāpi tesaṃ natthi. Iminā khīṇāsavānaṃ bhujissabhāvaṃ dasseti.
无学智就是阿拉汉果智。此身是最后身,就是指这最后一期的生命体。梵行的精髓,所谓精髓就是果。于彼不仰赖他,就是对于那个圣果,不再依靠别的什么来达成,而是以现前亲证而安住。于慢类而不动,就是在三种慢的范畴中不动摇。调伏地,就是阿拉汉果。战胜者,就是战胜了贪等烦恼而安住。巴利
Asekhañāṇanti arahattaphalañāṇaṃ. Antimoyaṃ samussayoti pacchimo ayaṃ attabhāvo. Yo sāro brahmacariyassāti sāro nāma phalaṃ. Tasmiṃ aparapaccayāti tasmiṃ ariyaphale, na aññaṃ pattiyāyanti, paccakkhatova paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitā. Vidhāsu na vikampantīti tīsu mānakoṭṭhāsesu na vikampanti. Dantabhūminti arahattaṃ. Vijitāvinoti rāgādayo vijetvā ṭhitā.
在“上方”等词中,“上方”指头顶,“下方”指脚掌,“横向”指中间。或者,“上方”指过去,“下方”指未来,“横向”指现在。又或者,“上方”指天界,“下方”指恶趣世间,“横向”指人界。所谓“他们于此无喜贪”,意思是:在这些处所中——或者简单说,在过去、未来、现在的诸蕴中——他们没有渴爱。这里显示的是轮回根本的渴爱不存在。“佛陀”:因为觉悟了四圣谛,所以称为佛陀。巴利
Uddhantiādīsu uddhaṃ vuccati kesamatthako, apācīnaṃ pādatalaṃ, tiriyaṃ vemajjhaṃ. Uddhaṃ vā atītaṃ, apācīnaṃ anāgataṃ, tiriyaṃ paccuppannaṃ. Uddhaṃ vā vuccati devaloko, apācīnaṃ apāyaloko, tiriyaṃ manussaloko. Nandī tesaṃ na vijjatīti etesu ṭhānesu saṅkhepato vā atītānāgatapaccuppannesu khandhesu tesaṃ taṇhā natthi. Idha vaṭṭamūlakataṇhāya abhāvo dassito. Buddhāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhattā buddhā.
不过,这里所包含的狮子吼是这样的:漏尽者们站在有顶天,发出被称为无畏吼的狮子吼——“我们因解脱之乐而安乐,能生痛苦的渴爱已被我们断除,五取蕴已被遍知,奴役人的渴爱和作为轮回根源的渴爱都已被断除,我们无与伦比、无可比拟,因为觉悟了四圣谛而成为佛陀。”第四。巴利
Idaṃ panettha sīhanādasamodhānaṃ – ‘‘vimuttisukhenamhā sukhitā, dukkhajanikā no taṇhā pahīnā, pañcakkhandhā pariññātā, dāsakārikataṇhā ceva vaṭṭamūlikataṇhā ca pahīnā, anuttaramhā asadisā, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhattā buddhā’’ti bhavapiṭṭhe ṭhatvā abhītanādasaṅkhātaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadanti khīṇāsavāti. Catutthaṃ.
第二阿拉汉经的注释巴利
5. Dutiyaarahantasuttavaṇṇanā
77 第五经没有偈颂,只是用长行直接讲述,这是顺应那些能觉悟者的意乐而说的。第五。巴利
77. Pañcamaṃ vinā gāthāhi suddhikameva katvā kathiyamānaṃ bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Pañcamaṃ.
《狮子经》的注释巴利
6. Sīhasuttavaṇṇanā
78 第六经中,“狮子”有四种:草狮、黑狮、黄狮、鬃毛狮。其中,草狮形如鸽色的牛,以草为食。黑狮形如黑色的牛,也以草为食。黄狮形如浅黄叶色的牛,以肉为食。鬃毛狮的面部、尾尖及四足末端,都呈现如虫胶汁处理过的色泽;从头顶开始,仿佛用虫胶画笔绘出三道条纹,沿背部中央延伸而下,进入两后腿之间后向右旋绕而止;肩部鬃毛如同围了一张价值十万金币的毡毯;身体其余部分极为清净,色泽如米粉、贝壳粉与棉絮。这四种狮子中,此处所指正是鬃毛狮。巴利
78. Chaṭṭhe sīhoti cattāro sīhā – tiṇasīho, kāḷasīho, paṇḍusīho, kesarasīhoti. Tesu tiṇasīho kapotavaṇṇagāvisadiso tiṇabhakkho ca hoti. Kāḷasīho kāḷagāvisadiso tiṇabhakkhoyeva. Paṇḍusīho paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇagāvisadiso maṃsabhakkho. Kesarasīho lākhārasaparikammakateneva mukhena agganaṅguṭṭhena catūhi ca pādapariyantehi samannāgato, matthakatopissa paṭṭhāya lākhātūlikāya katvā viya tisso rājiyo piṭṭhimajjhena gantvā antarasatthimhi dakkhiṇāvattā hutvā ṭhitā, khandhe panassa satasahassagghanikakambalaparikkhepo viya kesarabhāro hoti, avasesaṭṭhānaṃ parisuddhaṃ sālipiṭṭhasaṅkhacuṇṇapicuvaṇṇaṃ hoti. Imesu catūsu sīhesu ayaṃ kesarasīho idha adhippeto.
“兽王”就是兽群之王。说“从栖息处”,意思是它从居住的地方出来——或者从金窟出来,或者从银窟、宝石窟、水晶窟、红砒石窟出来。它出来有四种原因:或者被黑暗逼迫,为了找光明;或者被大小便逼迫,为了排泄;或者被饥饿逼迫,为了觅食;或者被交配欲逼迫,为了行非正法。但在这里,指的是为了觅食而出来。巴利
Migarājāti migagaṇassa rājā. Āsayāti vasanaṭṭhānato suvaṇṇaguhato vā rajatamaṇiphalikamanosilāguhato vā nikkhamatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nikkhamamāno panesa catūhi kāraṇehi nikkhamati andhakārapīḷito vā ālokatthāya, uccārapassāvapīḷito vā tesaṃ vissajjanatthāya, jighacchāpīḷito vā gocaratthāya, sambhavapīḷito vā assaddhammapaṭisevanatthāya. Idha pana gocaratthāya nikkhantoti adhippeto.
它伸展身体:站在金地、银地、宝石地、水晶地或红砒石地中的任何一处,把两条后脚平稳地立好,前脚向前伸出去,把身体的后半部往后拉,前半部往前送,弯下背,抬起脖子,像在发出雷声一样从鼻孔喷气,抖掉粘在身上的尘土,这就是伸展身体。然后,在伸展身体的地方,它像一头小牛犊一样来回奔跑。它奔跑的时候,身体在黑暗中看起来就像一把旋转的火把。巴利
Vijambhatīti suvaṇṇatale vā rajatamaṇiphalikamanosilātalānaṃ vā aññatarasmiṃ dve pacchimapāde samaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā purimapāde purato pasāretvā sarīrassa pacchābhāgaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā purimabhāgaṃ abhiharitvā piṭṭhiṃ nāmetvā gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā asanisaddaṃ karonto viya nāsapuṭāni pothetvā sarīralaggaṃ rajaṃ vidhunanto vijambhati. Vijambhanabhūmiyañca pana taruṇavacchako viya aparāparaṃ javati. Javato panassa sarīraṃ andhakāre paribbhamantaṃ alātaṃ viya khāyati.
“环视”:它为什么环视?是出于对众生的怜悯。据说,当它发出狮子吼时,在悬崖、深坑等险恶之处行走的象、牛、水牛等众生,会掉进悬崖或坑洞里。为了怜悯它们,它才环视。可是,这个做猎杀之事、吃他者之肉的家伙,怎么会有怜悯呢?确实有。因为它会想:“我杀那么多干什么?”即使是为了自己的觅食范围,它也不抓小动物,这就是在行怜悯。经里也这样说:“我不该让那些走在险处的小生命遭到杀害。”(增支部10.21)巴利
Anuviloketīti kasmā anuviloketi? Parānuddayatāya. Tasmiṃ kira sīhanādaṃ nadante papātāvāṭādīsu visamaṭṭhānesu carantā hatthigokaṇṇamahiṃsādayo pāṇā papātepi āvāṭepi patanti, tesaṃ anuddayāya anuviloketi. Kiṃ panassa luddakammassa paramaṃsakhādino anuddayā nāma atthīti? Āma atthi. Tathā hesa ‘‘kiṃ me bahūhi ghātitehī’’ti? Attano gocaratthāyapi khuddake pāṇe na gaṇhāti, evaṃ anuddayaṃ karoti. Vuttampicetaṃ – ‘‘māhaṃ kho khuddake pāṇe visamagate saṅghātaṃ āpādesi’’nti (a. ni. 10.21).
发出狮子吼:它先发出三次无所畏惧的吼声。当它站在伸展身体的地方发出吼声时,声音向四周传开,遍及三由旬的范围,汇成一片轰鸣。听到这吼声,三由旬之内的两足动物和四足动物都无法待在原地不动。为了觅食而出发:就是为了找食物而前往。它是怎么去的呢?它站在伸展身体的地方,向右或向左跳跃时,能跃过一牛呼那么远的距离;向上跳时,能跳到四牛呼甚至八牛呼那么高;在平地上直冲时,能冲过十六牛呼甚至二十牛呼那么远;朝陆地或山坡跳去时,能跳出六十牛呼甚至八十牛呼那么远;路上如果看到树或山,就会绕开躲过,向左或向右偏移大约一牛呼。发出第三次狮子吼之后,凭借那声音,在三由旬远的地方都能被察觉到。走到三由旬远的地方再返回站定,它还能听到自己吼声的回响。它就是以这样极快的速度前进的。巴利
Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti tikkhattuṃ tāva abhītanādaṃ nadati. Evañca panassa vijambhanabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā nadantassa saddo samantā tiyojanapadesaṃ ekaninnādaṃ karoti, tamassa ninnādaṃ sutvā tiyojanabbhantaragatā dvipadacatuppadagaṇā yathāṭhāne ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gocarāya pakkamatīti āhāratthāya gacchati. Kathaṃ? So hi vijambhanabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā dakkhiṇato vā vāmato vā uppatanto usabhamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti, uddhaṃ uppatanto cattāripi aṭṭhapi usabhāni uppatati, samaṭṭhāne ujukaṃ pakkhandanto soḷasausabhamattampi vīsatiusabhamattampi ṭhānaṃ pakkhandati, thalā vā pabbatā vā pakkhandanto saṭṭhiusabhamattampi asītiusabhamattampi ṭhānaṃ pakkhandati, antarāmagge rukkhaṃ vā pabbataṃ vā disvā taṃ pariharanto vāmato vā dakkhiṇato vā, usabhamattampi apakkamati. Tatiyaṃ pana sīhanādaṃ naditvā teneva saddhiṃ tiyojane ṭhāne paññāyati. Tiyojanaṃ gantvā nivattitvā ṭhito attanova nādassa anunādaṃ suṇāti. Evaṃ sīghena javena pakkamatīti.
“大部分”是指通常、多数。“怖畏”“悚惧”“恐惧”,这些都是内心惊恐的同义词。听到狮子的吼声,大多数众生会害怕,只有少数不怕。那么哪些不怕呢?就是与狮子同等的、良象、良马、良牛、良人,以及漏已尽的阿拉汉。为什么这些不怕呢?所谓“与狮子同等”,是自认为“在出身、种姓、家族和勇猛上我都和它一样”,所以不怕;良象等则因为自身的有身见仍然强而有力,所以不怕;漏已尽的阿拉汉则因为彻底断除了有身见,所以不怕。巴利
Yebhuyyenāti pāyena. Bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsanti sabbaṃ cittutrāsasseva nāmaṃ. Sīhassa hi saddaṃ sutvā bahū sattā bhāyanti, appakā na bhāyanti. Ke pana teti? Samasīho hatthājānīyo assājānīyo usabhājānīyo purisājānīyo khīṇāsavoti. Kasmā panete na bhāyantīti? Samasīho nāma ‘‘jātigottakulasūrabhāvehi samānosmī’’ti na bhāyati, hatthājānīyādayo attano sakkāyadiṭṭhibalavatāya na bhāyanti, khīṇāsavo sakkāyadiṭṭhipahīnattā na bhāyati.
住在洞穴里的,是指那些在洞穴中栖息、以洞穴为家的众生,比如蛇、獴、蜥蜴等。住在水里的,是指那些在水中生活的众生,比如鱼、龟等。住在森林里的,是指那些在森林中栖息的众生,比如象、马、大羚羊、鹿等。它们进入,是说它们一边盯着来路,心里想着“现在它一过来就会抓住我们”,一边就钻了进去。以坚固的,是指用牢固的。以皮绳,是指用兽皮做的绳子。关于“有大神通”等说法,应当这样理解:狮子站在伸展身体的地方,从右侧等方向一跃可达一牛呼之高,或笔直向前跳出二十牛呼之远,凭这种跳跃能力而具有“大神通”;又因为它是一切兽类之王,所以具有“大威德”;方圆三由旬之内的众生一听到它的吼声就纷纷逃跑,以此显示出它的“大神力”。巴利
Bilāsayāti bile sayantā bilavāsino ahinakulagodhādayo. Dakāsayāti udakavāsino macchakacchapādayo. Vanāsayāti vanavāsino hatthiassagokaṇṇamigādayo. Pavisantīti ‘‘idāni āgantvā gaṇhissatī’’ti maggaṃ olokentāva pavisanti. Daḷhehīti thirehi. Varattehīti cammarajjūhi. Mahiddhikotiādīsu vijambhanabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā dakkhiṇapassādīhi usabhamattaṃ, ujukaṃ vīsatiusabhamattādilaṅghanavasena mahiddhikatā, sesamigānaṃ adhipatibhāvena mahesakkhatā, samantā tiyojane saddaṃ sutvā palāyantānaṃ vasena mahānubhāvatā veditabbā.
正是如此——世尊在各种各样的经里,用各种各样的方式讲述自己。比如在这部经里,他说:“比丘们,‘狮子’这个称呼,就是如来、阿罗汉、正等正觉者的代名词。”这是把自己说成和狮子一样。在另一部经里,他对善星说:“善星啊,‘医师、外科医生’这个称呼,就是如来的代名词。”这是把自己说成和医生一样。又有经说:“比丘们,‘婆罗门’这个称呼,就是如来的代名词。”这是把自己说成和婆罗门一样。又有经说:“提舍,‘识路的能人’这个称呼,就是如来的代名词。”这是把自己说成和指路人一样。又有经说:“谢喇啊,我是王。”这是把自己说成和国王一样。而在这部经里,他说“‘狮子’这个称呼,就是如来的代名词”,这就是完全把自己比作狮子之后,才这样说的。巴利
Evamevakhoti bhagavā tesu tesu suttesu tathā tathā attānaṃ kathesi. ‘‘Sīhoti kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti (a. ni. 5.99; 10.21) imasmiṃ tāva sutte sīhasadisaṃ attānaṃ kathesi. ‘‘Bhisakko sallakattoti kho, sunakkhatta, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (ma. ni. 3.65) imasmiṃ vejjasadisaṃ. ‘‘Brāhmaṇoti, bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (a. ni. 8.85) imasmiṃ brāhmaṇasadisaṃ. ‘‘Puriso maggakusaloti kho, tissa, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.84) imasmiṃ maggadesakapurisasadisaṃ. ‘‘Rājāhamasmi selā’’ti (su. ni. 559) imasmiṃ rājasadisaṃ. ‘‘Sīhoti kho tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (a. ni. 5.99; 10.21) imasmiṃ pana sutte sīhasadisameva katvā attānaṃ kathento evamāha.
这里说的相似之处是这样的:就像狮子住在金洞等地方的那段时间,如来在燃灯佛足下发下大愿之后,经过不可计算的时间圆满种种波罗蜜,在最后一世入胎投生、又从母胎降生,那时震动了一万个世界;后来逐渐长大,享受像天界福报一样的荣华,住在三座宫殿里的那段时间,应当理解为跟狮子住在金洞的情形相似。又像狮子从金洞等地方出来的那段时间,如来在二十九岁那年,从敞开的城门出去,骑上犍陟马,由车匿陪同离开,越过三个王国,在阿耨摩河岸边穿上大梵天供养的袈裟而出家;出家第七天到了王舍城,在那里托钵乞食,在般度婆山背阴处吃完饭;当他证得正自觉后,为了最先前往摩揭陀国,直到国王答应供养的那段时间,应当理解为跟狮子从金洞出来的情形相似。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā – sīhassa kañcanaguhādīsu vasanakālo viya hi tathāgatassa dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhārassa aparimitakālaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā pacchimabhave paṭisandhiggahaṇena ceva mātukucchito nikkhamanena ca dasasahassilokadhātuṃ kampetvā vuddhimanvāya dibbasampattisadisaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavamānassa tīsu pāsādesu nivāsakālo daṭṭhabbo. Sīhassa kañcanaguhādito nikkhantakālo viya tathāgatassa ekūnatiṃse saṃvacchare vivaṭena dvārena kaṇḍakaṃ āruyha channasahāyassa nikkhamitvā tīṇi rajjāni atikkamitvā anomānadītīre brahmunā dinnāni kāsāyāni paridahitvā pabbajitassa sattame divase rājagahaṃ gantvā tattha piṇḍāya caritvā paṇḍavagiripabbhāre katabhattakiccassa sammāsambodhiṃ patvā, paṭhamameva magadharaṭṭhaṃ āgamanatthāya yāva rañño paṭiññādānakālo.
应该这样理解:就像狮子伸懒腰的那段时间,如来从给予(频婆娑罗王)允诺之后,前往阿罗逻迦罗摩那里开始,一直到接受善生女供养的四十九个饭团乳粥并吃下为止,这段时间就是(对应的)那一段。就像狮子抖动鬃毛那样,应该理解为:傍晚时分,如来接受割草人供养的八把草,被一万个世界体系的诸天赞叹、用香等供养,右绕菩提树三圈,然后登上菩提座,在十四肘高的地方铺好草座,决意发起四种精进力,坐下之后,就在那一刹那摧破魔军,在三个夜时中清净三种明,以双智之搅拌搅动顺逆缘起之大海,当一切知智现前证得时,凭借那个威力震动一万个世界体系——这一段应该理解为(对应的)那一段。巴利
Sīhassa vijambhanakālo viya tathāgatassa dinnapaṭiññassa āḷārakālāmaupasaṅkamanaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva sujātāya dinnapāyāsassa ekūnapaṇṇāsāya piṇḍehi paribhuttakālo veditabbo. Sīhassa kesaravidhunanaṃ viya sāyanhasamaye sottiyena dinnā aṭṭha tiṇamuṭṭhiyo gahetvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatāhi thomiyamānassa gandhādīhi pūjiyamānassa tikkhattuṃ bodhiṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha cuddasahatthubbedhe ṭhāne tiṇasantharaṃ santharitvā caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya nisinnassa taṃkhaṇaṃyeva mārabalaṃ vidhamitvā tīsu yāmesu tisso vijjā visodhetvā anulomapaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādamahāsamuddaṃ yamakañāṇamanthanena manthentassa sabbaññutaññāṇe paṭividdhe tadanubhāvena dasasahassilokadhātukampanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如来像狮子一样环视四方的那段时间,应当这样理解:他证得一切知智之后,在菩提座下住了七个七天,受用了蜜丸之食,然后在阿阇波罗榕树下接受了大梵天的劝请而为他说法,并住在那里。到了第十天,他在黎明时分知道“明天就是阿沙荼月的满月日”,心想:“我应当先为谁说法呢?”他得知阿罗逻和郁多迦已经去世,为了说法,应当观看五群比丘。这应当看作如来像狮子一样环视四方。接着,就像狮子为了觅食而行走三由旬的时候,应当这样理解:如来自己拿起钵和衣,心想“我要为五群比丘转法轮”,在午饭后从阿阇波罗榕树下起身,踏上十八由旬路程的那段时间。巴利
Sīhassa catuddisāvilokanaṃ viya paṭividdhasabbaññutaññāṇassa sattasattāhaṃ bodhimaṇḍe viharitvā paribhuttamadhupiṇḍikāhārassa ajapālanigrodhamūle mahābrahmuno dhammadesanāyācanaṃ paṭiggahetvā tattha viharantassa ekādasame divase ‘‘sve āsāḷhipuṇṇamā bhavissatī’’ti paccūsasamaye ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti? Āḷārudakānaṃ kālaṅkatabhāvaṃ ñatvā dhammadesanatthāya pañcavaggiyānaṃ olokanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sīhassa gocaratthāya tiyojanaṃ gamanakālo viya attano pattacīvaramādāya ‘‘pañcavaggiyānaṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattessāmī’’ti pacchābhatte ajapālanigrodhato vuṭṭhitassa aṭṭhārasayojanamaggaṃ gamanakālo.
应当这样理解狮子吼的时机:如来走了十八由旬的路,教化五比丘,然后坐在不动的座上,被聚集在一万个世界里的天众围绕,以“比丘们,出家人不应亲近两种极端”等语开始转动法轮的那段时间。当这个句子被宣说时,如来狮子吼的法音向下传到无间地狱,向上达到有顶天,覆盖了整个一万个世界。又应当这样理解:就像狮子吼声让弱小动物感到恐惧的时候,如来开示三相,用十六种方式、六万种理趣分别解说四圣谛,为长寿的天人们说法,使他们心中生起由智而生的惊怖,那段时间也是如此。巴利
Sīhanādakālo viya tathāgatassa aṭṭhārasayojanamaggaṃ gantvā pañcavaggiye saññāpetvā acalapallaṅke nisinnassa dasahi cakkavāḷasahassehi sannipatitena devagaṇena parivutassa ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13) nayena dhammacakkappavattanakālo veditabbo. Imasmiñca pana pade desiyamāne tathāgatasīhassa dhammaghoso heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ gahetvā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ paṭicchādesi. Sīhassa saddena khuddakapāṇānaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjanakālo viya tathāgatassa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni dīpetvā cattāri saccāni soḷasahākārehi saṭṭhiyā ca nayasahassehi vibhajitvā dhammaṃ kathentassa dīghāyukadevatānaṃ ñāṇasantāsassa uppattikālo veditabbo.
“每当”是指在任何时候。“如来”:世尊依八种原因而被称为如来——如是而来,所以叫如来;如是而去,所以叫如来;通达真实相,所以叫如来;对真实法如实觉悟,所以叫如来;具足如实见,所以叫如来;具足如实语,所以叫如来;具足如实行,所以叫如来;以超胜之义,所以叫如来。这些的详细解释,在《梵网经》注(长部注1.7)和《根本法门经》注(中部注1.12)中已经说过。“世间”是指有情世间。“出现”:从发愿成佛开始,一直到登上菩提座,或者到证得阿拉汉道智之前,都叫“正在出现”;证得阿拉汉果时,则叫“已出现”。“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等词,在《清净道论》佛随念的解释中已详细说明。巴利
Yadāti yasmiṃ kāle. Tathāgatoti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathāvāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato. Abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti. Tesaṃ vitthāro brahmajālavaṇṇanāyampi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) mūlapariyāyavaṇṇanāyampi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12) vuttoyeva. Loketi sattaloke. Uppajjatīti abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva bodhipallaṅkā vā arahattamaggañāṇā vā uppajjati nāma , arahattaphale pana patte uppanno nāma. Arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotiādīni visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritāni.
“像这样是色”:这个色就这么多,色的范围不超过这个。到这一步,从自性、从本质、从界限、从限定、从区分来说,四大种以及四大种所造色,全都已经显示了。“像这样,是色的集起”:这就是色的集起。到这一步,“食的集起就是色的集起”等一切内容都已经显示了。“像这样,是色的灭去”:这就是色的灭去。由此也显示了“食的灭去就是色的灭去”等一切内容。“像这样是受”等句,也应当按同样的方法来理解。巴利
Iti rūpanti idaṃ rūpaṃ ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito bhiyyo rūpaṃ atthīti. Ettāvatā sabhāvato sarasato pariyantato paricchedato paricchindanato yāvatā cattāro ca mahābhūtā catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Iti rūpassa samudayoti ayaṃ rūpassa samudayo nāma. Ettāvatā hi ‘‘āhārasamudayo rūpasamudayo’’tiādi sabbaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Iti rūpassa atthaṅgamoti ayaṃ rūpassa atthaṅgamo. Imināpi ‘‘āhāranirodhā rūpanirodho’’tiādi sabbaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Iti vedanātiādīsupi eseva nayo.
“具足容色”是指身体容貌端严。“听闻了法的开示”是指听闻了如来这以五十种行相庄严五蕴的法开示。“大多数”在这里是把谁排除在外呢?是那些圣弟子天人。因为他们已经漏尽,所以心中连惊恐畏惧都不会生起;又因为已证得如理精勤所应证得之境,所以连智上的悚惧也没有。然而其余那些天人,在把心转向无常、想着“这(比丘们)是恐怖的啊”的时候,心中既会生起惊恐畏惧,在强力观智生起的时刻也会生起智上的怖畏。“尊者”只是称呼用语而已。“属于有身的”是指包含在五取蕴之内。就这样,当正自觉者向他们揭示轮回的过患,以三相击打的方式为他们说法时,一种称为“智怖畏”的感受便会进入他们心中。巴利
Vaṇṇavantoti sarīravaṇṇena vaṇṇavanto. Dhammadesanaṃ sutvāti imaṃ pañcasu khandhesu paṇṇāsalakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā. Yebhuyyenāti idha ke ṭhapeti? Ariyasāvake deve. Tesañhi khīṇāsavattā cittutrāsabhayampi na uppajjati, saṃviggassa yoniso padhānena pattabbaṃ pattatāya ñāṇasaṃvegopi. Itaresaṃ pana devānaṃ ‘‘tāso heso bhikkhū’’ti aniccataṃ manasikarontānaṃ cittutrāsabhayampi, balavavipassanākāle ñāṇabhayampi uppajjati. Bhoti dhammālapanamattametaṃ. Sakkāyapariyāpannāti pañcakkhandhapariyāpannā. Iti tesaṃ sammāsambuddhe vaṭṭadosaṃ dassetvā tilakkhaṇāhataṃ katvā dhammaṃ desente ñāṇabhayaṃ nāma okkamati.
“证通”就是已经知道了。“法轮”既指证悟的智慧,也指教说的智慧。所谓证悟的智慧,是指坐在菩提座上,以十六种行相、六万种理趣,通达四圣谛的那种智慧。所谓教说的智慧,是指以三转十二行相转动法轮的那种智慧。这两种都是那十力者心中生起的智慧。在这里应当取教说的智慧。而所谓“他转动法轮”,是说当憍陈如尊者连同十八俱胝梵天一起证得入流果时,法轮便转动起来了。应当知道:入流果在他心中生起的那一刻,法轮就已经被转动了。“无匹敌者”即没有同等之人。“有名声者”即具足眷属。“如如者”即于得与不得等事上平等一如。第六。巴利
Abhiññāyāti jānitvā. Dhammacakkanti paṭivedhañāṇampi desanāñāṇampi. Paṭivedhañāṇaṃ nāma yena ñāṇena bodhipallaṅke nisinno cattāri saccāni soḷasahākārehi saṭṭhiyā ca nayasahassehi paṭivijjhi. Desanāñāṇaṃ nāma yena ñāṇena tiparivaṭṭaṃ dvādasākāraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattesi. Ubhayampi taṃ dasabalassa ure jātañāṇameva. Tesu idha desanāñāṇaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Taṃ panesa yāva aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ aññāsikoṇḍaññattherassa sotāpattiphalaṃ uppajjati, tāva pavatteti nāma. Tasmiṃ uppanne pavattitaṃ nāma hotīti veditabbaṃ. Appaṭipuggaloti sadisapuggalarahito. Yasassinoti parivārasampannā. Tādinoti lābhālābhādīhi ekasadisassa. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《可咀嚼经》的注释巴利
7. Khajjanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
79 第七经里说的“宿住”,不是指用神通去回忆过去,而是针对那些以观智随念宿住的沙门、婆罗门说的。所以世尊才说:“他们全都在随念五取蕴,或者随念其中一种。”因为如果是以神通力随念,那么蕴、取蕴、与蕴相关者以及施设,全都可以成为心的所缘。所谓“他只是在随念色”,意思是这样随念的人并不是在忆念任何“有情”或“补特伽罗”,而只是在忆念过去已经灭去的色蕴。受等诸蕴也应同样理解。空品讲解完毕。巴利
79. Sattame pubbenivāsanti na idaṃ abhiññāvasena anussaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, vipassanāvasena pana pubbenivāsaṃ anussarante samaṇabrāhmaṇe sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘sabbete pañcupādānakkhandhe anussaranti, etesaṃ vā aññatara’’nti. Abhiññāvasena hi samanussarantassa khandhāpi upādānakkhandhāpi khandhapaṭibaddhāpi paṇṇattipi ārammaṇaṃ hotiyeva. Rūpaṃyeva anussaratīti evañhi anussaranto na aññaṃ kiñci sattaṃ vā puggalaṃ vā anussarati, atīte pana niruddhaṃ rūpakkhandhameva anussarati. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayoti. Suññatāpabbaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
现在,为了显示空的特相,经文接着说:“诸比丘,你们为什么说‘色’呢?”等等。就像一个人寻找走失的牛,即使看见在牛群中走动的红色、黑色或强壮的牛,也不能仅凭这一点就断定“这是我的牛”。为什么?因为别的牛也可能长得一样。但当他看到牛身上有矛刺伤痕等特征时,就能确定“这是我的牛”。同样,即使讲了空,只要还没有讲空的特相,空就等于没讲;讲了特相,才算真正讲了空。空好比牛,空的特相好比牛的特征。就像没有认清牛的特征,就不能说真正认出了牛;一旦认清了特征,才算真正认出了牛。同样,没有讲清空的特相,空就等于没讲;讲清了它,才算真正讲了空。为了显示空的特相,经文接着说:“诸比丘,你们为什么说‘色’呢?”等等。巴利
Idāni suññatāya lakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ kiñca, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ vadethātiādimāha. Yathā hi naṭṭhaṃ goṇaṃ pariyesamāno puriso gogaṇe caramāne rattaṃ vā kāḷaṃ vā balībaddaṃ disvāpi na ettakeneva ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ goṇo’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti. Kasmā? Aññesampi tādisānaṃ atthitāya. Sarīrapadese panassa sattisūlādilakkhaṇaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ santako’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ hoti, evameva suññatāya kathitāyapi yāva suññatālakkhaṇaṃ na kathīyati, tāva sā akathitāva hoti, lakkhaṇe pana kathite kathitā nāma hoti. Goṇo viya hi suññatā, goṇalakkhaṇaṃ viya suññatālakkhaṇaṃ. Yathā goṇalakkhaṇe asallakkhite goṇo na suṭṭhu sallakkhito hoti, tasmiṃ pana sallakkhite so sallakkhito nāma hoti, evameva suññatālakkhaṇe akathite suññatā akathitāva hoti, tasmiṃ pana kathite sā kathitā nāma hotīti suññatālakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ kiñca, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ vadethātiādimāha.
这里,“为什么”是问原因:你们根据什么理由说“色”?因为什么原因这被称为“色”?意思是这样的。在“因为变坏”这句话里,“因为”是点出原因,意思是:由于它会变坏,所以称为“色”。“变坏”就是被扰乱、被撞击、被压迫,也就是被破坏的意思。在“因寒冷而变坏”等说法中,首先,因寒冷而变坏在世界间隙地狱里最为明显。每三个轮围世界之间就有一个世界间隙地狱,广达八千由旬。那里下面没有大地,上面没有日月、灯或宝珠的光明,永远是一片黑暗。投生在那里的众生,身体有三伽乌塔那么大,他们像蝙蝠一样,用又长又宽的指甲抓住山脚,头朝下倒悬着。当他们爬动着,彼此靠近到伸手可及的距离时,心里就想:“我们是不是找到吃的了?”于是就在那里翻来覆去,然后翻转身体,坠入支撑世界的水中;即使被风一吹,也像摩头迦果一样碎裂,掉进水里。刚一落入那极咸的水中,就像面团掉进滚烫的油锅一样,噼里啪啦地融化掉。这就是因寒冷而变坏在世界间隙地狱里明显可见的情形。在摩醯娑迦国等地区,以及降雪寒冷的地方,这一点也很明显。因为在那些地方,众生被寒冷冻裂身体,甚至因此丧命。巴利
Tattha kiñcāti kāraṇapucchā, kena kāraṇena rūpaṃ vadetha, kena kāraṇenetaṃ rūpaṃ nāmāti attho. Ruppatīti khoti ettha itīti kāraṇuddeso, yasmā ruppati, tasmā rūpanti vuccatīti attho. Ruppatīti kuppati ghaṭṭīyati pīḷīyati, bhijjatīti attho. Sītenapi ruppatītiādīsu sītena tāva ruppanaṃ lokantarikaniraye pākaṭaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇañhi cakkavāḷānaṃ antare ekeko lokantarikanirayo nāma hoti aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇo. Yassa neva heṭṭhā pathavī atthi, na upari candimasūriyadīpamaṇiāloko, niccandhakāro. Tattha nibbattasattānaṃ tigāvuto attabhāvo hoti, te vagguliyo viya pabbatapāde dīghaputhulehi nakhehi laggitvā avaṃsirā olambanti. Yadā saṃsappantā aññamaññassa hatthapāsāgatā honti, atha ‘‘bhakkho no laddho’’ti? Maññamānā tattha byāvaṭā viparivattitvā lokasandhārake udake patanti, vāte paharantepi madhukaphalāni viya chijjitvā udake patanti, patitamattāva accantakhāre udake tattatele patitapiṭṭhapiṇḍi viya paṭapaṭāyamānā vilīyanti. Evaṃ sītena ruppanaṃ lokantarikaniraye pākaṭaṃ. Mahiṃsakaraṭṭhādīsupi himapātasītalesu padesesu etaṃ pākaṭameva. Tattha hi sattā sītena bhinnasarīrā jīvitakkhayampi pāpuṇanti.
被热所逼迫的变坏,在无间大地狱里表现得最明显。被饥饿所逼迫的变坏,在饿鬼界和饥荒时期都很常见。被干渴所逼迫的变坏,在黑耳阿修罗等众生身上很明显。据说有一个黑耳阿修罗,实在受不了干渴,就跳进一条一由旬深、一由旬宽的大河里。可他走到哪里,水就在哪里断开,还冒出烟雾,那情形就像在烧得滚烫的石板上来回走动一样。他听到水声,就东奔西跑到处找,一整夜就这样过去了。天亮时,大约三十位外出托钵的比丘看见了他,问道:“善士,你是谁?”他说:“尊者,我是饿鬼。”“你在找什么?”“找水喝,尊者。”“这条大河满满都是水,你怎么看不见?”“那对我没用,尊者。”比丘们就说:“那你躺在河岸上,我们往你嘴里倒水。”他就仰面躺在沙滩上。比丘们拿出大约三十个钵,装满水,往他嘴里倒。就在他们这样做的时候,时间已经快到了。于是比丘们说:“善士,我们该去托钵了。你多少尝到一点滋味了吗?”饿鬼说:“尊者,如果三十位尊者用三十个钵倒进我嘴里的水,能有哪怕一丁点流到喉咙以下,我就不会还困在这饿鬼之身里了!”就这样,被干渴所逼迫的变坏,在饿鬼界里表现得很明显。巴利
Uṇhena ruppanaṃ avīcimahāniraye pākaṭaṃ hoti. Jighacchāya ruppanaṃ pettivisaye ceva dubbhikkhakāle ca pākaṭaṃ. Pipāsāya ruppanaṃ kālakañjikādīsu pākaṭaṃ. Eko kira kālakañjikaasuro pipāsaṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto yojanagambhīravitthāraṃ mahāgaṅgaṃ otari, tassa gatagataṭṭhāne udakaṃ chijjati, dhūmo uggacchati, tatte piṭṭhipāsāṇe caṅkamanakālo viya hoti. Tassa udakasaddaṃ sutvā ito cito ca vicarantasseva ratti vibhāyi. Atha naṃ pātova bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantā tiṃsamattā piṇḍacārikabhikkhū disvā ‘‘ko nāma tvaṃ sappurisā’’ti? Pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Petohamasmi, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ pariyesasī’’ti? ‘‘Pānīyaṃ, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Ayaṃ gaṅgā paripuṇṇā, kiṃ tvaṃ na passasī’’ti? ‘‘Na upakappati, bhante’’ti. Tena hi gaṅgāpiṭṭhe nipajja, mukhe te pānīyaṃ āsiñcissāmā’’ti. So vālikāpuḷine uttāno nipajji. Bhikkhū tiṃsamatte patte nīharitvā udakaṃ āharitvā tassa mukhe āsiñciṃsu. Tesaṃ tathā karontānaṃyeva velā upakaṭṭhā jātā. Tato ‘‘bhikkhācārakālo amhākaṃ sappurisa, kacci te assādamattā laddhā’’ti āhaṃsu. Peto ‘‘sace me, bhante, tiṃsamattānaṃ ayyānaṃ tiṃsapattehi āsittaudakato aḍḍhapasatamattampi paragalaṃ gataṃ, petattabhāvato mokkho mā hotū’’ti āha. Evaṃ pipāsāya ruppanaṃ pettivisaye pākaṭaṃ.
被虻、蝇之类叮咬而受损,这在虻蝇等大量出没的地方很明显。这里说的“虻”,是指黄褐色的苍蝇。“蚊”,就是蚊子。“风”要理解为腹风、背风等。因为身体里起了风病,就会破坏手脚、背部等部位,让人变成独眼、驼背、跛脚。“热”是指太阳的热。被热所害,在沙漠之类的地方很明显。据说有个女人夜里被商队落在沙漠里,白天太阳升起,沙子被晒得滚烫,她没法把脚放下去,就把头上顶的篮子取下来踩上去。慢慢地,篮子也被烤得滚烫,站不住了,她就把衣服铺在篮子上再踩上去。衣服也烫得受不了时,她把自己怀里抱着的孩子脸朝下放倒,孩子哭着,她就这么踩上去,连孩子一起,在那个地方被烫死了。巴利
Ḍaṃsādīhi ruppanaṃ ḍaṃsamakkhikādibahulesu padesesu pākaṭaṃ. Ettha ca ḍaṃsāti piṅgalamakkhikā. Makasāti makasāva. Vātāti kucchivātapiṭṭhivātādivasena veditabbā. Sarīrasmiñhi vātarogo uppajjitvā hatthapādapiṭṭhiādīni bhindati, kāṇaṃ karoti, khujjaṃ karoti, pīṭhasappiṃ karoti. Ātapoti sūriyātapo. Tena ruppanaṃ marukantārādīsu pākaṭaṃ. Ekā kira itthī marukantāre rattiṃ satthato ohīnā divā sūriye uggacchante vālikāya tappamānāya pāde ṭhapetuṃ asakkontī sīsato pacchiṃ otāretvā akkami. Kamena pacchiyā uṇhābhitattāya ṭhātuṃ asakkontī tassā upari sāṭakaṃ ṭhapetvā akkami. Tasmimpi santatte attano aṅkena gahitaputtakaṃ adhomukhaṃ nipajjāpetvā kandantaṃyeva akkamitvā saddhiṃ tena tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne uṇhābhitattā kālamakāsi.
“爬行类”指的是所有身体细长、靠爬行前进的动物。它们因接触而造成的伤害,应当通过被毒蛇咬伤等情况来理解。这样,世尊在诸法的共相和自相这两种相中,首先显示了色蕴的自相。因为这种“变坏”只属于色蕴,不属于受蕴等,所以称为自相。而无常、苦、无我这三相,在受蕴等当中也同样存在,所以称为共相。巴利
Sarīsapāti ye keci dīghajātikā sarantā gacchanti. Tesaṃ samphassena ruppanaṃ āsīvisadaṭṭhakādīnaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ. Iti bhagavatā yāni imāni sāmaññapaccattavasena dhammānaṃ dve lakkhaṇāni, tesu rūpakkhandhassa tāva paccattalakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ. Rūpakkhandhasseva hi etaṃ, na vedanādīnaṃ , tasmā paccattalakkhaṇanti vuccati. Aniccadukkhānattalakkhaṇaṃ pana vedanādīnampi hoti, tasmā taṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇanti vuccati.
比丘们,在“你们为什么说‘受’呢”等这些句子里,应当按照和前面一样的方式去理解。至于和前面不同的地方,这里加以说明:“他也感受乐”,意思是说,他体验、领受乐的所缘,也就是去感受它。接下来两个词,也同样这样理解。那么,这个所缘为什么称为乐、苦、不苦不乐呢?这是根据乐等感受生起的缘来安立的。这个道理在《摩诃梨经》里其实已经说过:“摩诃梨,因为色是乐、是随顺乐的、是伴随乐的……”在这里,“感受”这个作用,是受本身在感受,并不是另外有什么有情或某个人在感受。因为受的特相就是感受,所以它只是依托根和所缘而生起,由受本身去感受。这样,世尊在这里把受的自相也分别开示了出来。巴利
Kiñca, bhikkhave, vedanaṃ vadethātiādīsu purimasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana purimena asadisaṃ, tassāyaṃ vibhāvanā – sukhampi vedayatīti sukhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedeti anubhavati. Parato padadvayepi eseva nayo. Kathaṃ panetaṃ ārammaṇaṃ sukhaṃ dukkhaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ nāma jātanti? Sukhādīnaṃ paccayato. Svāyamattho ‘‘yasmā ca kho, mahāli, rūpaṃ sukhaṃ sukhānupatitaṃ sukhāvakkanta’’nti imasmiṃ mahālisutte (saṃ. ni. 3.60) āgatoyeva. Vedayatīti ettha ca vedanāva vedayati, na añño satto vā puggalo vā. Vedanā hi vedayitalakkhaṇā, tasmā vatthārammaṇaṃ paṭicca vedanāva vedayatīti. Evamidha bhagavā vedanāyapi paccattalakkhaṇameva bhājetvā dassesi.
他也能认知青色:意思是,对青色的花或布等对象作好预备之后,进入近行定或安止定而认知。因为这种“想”,无论是预备阶段的想、近行阶段的想,还是安止阶段的想,都算数;甚至只是“青、青”这样生起的认知,也同样算数。对黄色等其他颜色,道理也是一样。在这里,世尊同样是把以“认知”为特相的想,按它各自独有的特征加以区分并开示出来。巴利
Nīlampi sañjānātīti nīlapupphe vā vatthe vā parikammaṃ katvā upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā pāpento sañjānāti. Ayañhi saññā nāma parikammasaññāpi upacārasaññāpi appanāsaññāpi vaṭṭati, nīlaṃ nīlanti uppajjanasaññāpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Pītakādīsupi eseva nayo. Idhāpi bhagavā sañjānanalakkhaṇāya saññāya paccattalakkhaṇameva bhājetvā dassesi.
色被造作,是为了成为色,就像煮粥是为了让它成为粥,烤饼是为了让它成为饼一样。同样地,色由诸缘聚合而成,因此被称为“所作”;而这样的色,为了成为色、为了达到色的状态,就造作、努力、聚合、产生——这就是这里的含义。受等诸法也是同样的道理。这里简要地说:它造作并产生与自己同时生起的色,以及与它相应的受等诸法。在这里,世尊也是把以思为特相的行蕴的自相特别区分开来加以开示。巴利
Rūpaṃ rūpattāya saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti yathā yāgumeva yāguttāya, pūvameva pūvattāya pacati nāma, evaṃ paccayehi samāgantvā katabhāvena saṅkhatanti laddhanāmaṃ rūpameva rūpattāya yathā abhisaṅkhataṃ rūpaṃ nāma hoti, tathattāya rūpabhāvāya abhisaṅkharoti āyūhati sampiṇḍeti, nipphādetīti attho. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – attanā saha jāyamānaṃ rūpaṃ sampayutte ca vedanādayo dhamme abhisaṅkharoti nibbattetīti. Idhāpi bhagavā cetayitalakkhaṇassa saṅkhārassa paccattalakkhaṇameva bhājetvā dassesi.
“它尝出酸味”:就是识别出芒果、野芒果、枸橼等酸的东西是“酸的”。所有这类词都照这个方式理解。这里还要知道,所谓“苦”,是指苦楝、苦瓜等各种各样的苦;所谓“辣”,是指荜茇、胡椒等各种各样的辣;所谓“甜”,是指酥油、糖蜜等各种各样的甜;所谓“涩”,是指茄子、椰子、四棱豆藤芽等各种各样的涩;所谓“不涩”,是指任何一种果实,或是混了咖喱叶之类的杂叶;所谓“咸”,是指咸粥、咸鱼、咸饭等各种各样的咸;所谓“不咸”,是指无盐粥、无盐鱼、无盐饭等各种各样的不咸。因此称为识:因为它以酸等各自不同、互相区别的状态,了知这些酸等的类别,所以称为识。在这里,世尊同样把以了知为特相的识的自相单独开示了出来。巴利
Ambilampivijānātīti ambaambāṭakamātuluṅgādiambilaṃ ‘‘ambila’’nti vijānāti. Eseva nayo sabbapadesu. Api cettha tittakanti nimbapaṭolādinānappakāraṃ kaṭukanti pippalimaricādinānappakāraṃ. Madhuranti sappiphāṇitādinānappakāraṃ . Khārikanti vātiṅgaṇanāḷikera caturassavallivettaṅkurādinānappakāraṃ. Akhārikanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā phalajātaṃ kārapaṇṇādimissakapaṇṇaṃ. Loṇikanti loṇayāguloṇamacchaloṇabhattādinānappakāraṃ. Aloṇikantialoṇayāgualoṇamacchaaloṇabhattādinānappakāraṃ. Tasmā viññāṇanti vuccatīti yasmā imaṃ ambilādibhedaṃ aññamaññavisiṭṭhena ambilādibhāvena jānāti, tasmā viññāṇanti vuccatīti. Evamidhāpi bhagavā vijānanalakkhaṇassa viññāṇassa paccattalakkhaṇameva bhājetvā dassesi.
因为想是靠着抓取所缘的形相和形态才变得明显,所以它被分在眼门里说明。因为识即使没有形相和形态,也能靠着抓取所缘各自不同的差别而变得明显,所以它被分在舌门里说明。对于想、识、慧这三者,为了不混淆、如实看清它们各自的自性,应当了解“想”“识”“了知”在这里的差别。其中,差别只在前缀上,而“知”这个词本身没有差别。不过,即使就“知”这个意义来说,也应当了解它们的差别。想只是依青等相状识别所缘,不能达到通达无常、苦、无我这些特相。识既依青等相状了知所缘,也能达到通达无常等特相,但即使再努力,也不能让道现前。慧既依青等相状了知所缘,也能达到通达无常等特相,并且努力之后,还能让道现前。巴利
Yasmā pana ārammaṇassa ākārasaṇṭhānagahaṇavasena saññā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā sā cakkhudvāre vibhattā. Yasmā vināpi ākārasaṇṭhānā ārammaṇassa paccattabhedagahaṇavasena viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmā taṃ jivhādvāre vibhattaṃ. Imesaṃ pana saññāviññāṇapaññānaṃ asammohato sabhāvasallakkhaṇatthaṃ sañjānāti, vijānāti, pajānātīti ettha visesā veditabbā. Tattha upasaggamattameva viseso, jānātīti padaṃ pana aviseso. Tassapi jānanaṭṭhena viseso veditabbo. Saññā hi nīlādivasena ārammaṇasañjānanamattameva, aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Viññāṇaṃ nīlādivasena ārammaṇañceva jānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhañca pāpeti, ussakkitvā pana maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Paññā nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi jānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvampi pāpeti.
就像在一张兑换商的板上堆起一堆金币,站着观看的三个人当中,一个还不懂事的小孩只认得金币的颜色、花纹、方形、圆形这些样子,不知道“这是人们拿来享用、公认的宝物”。村民既认得颜色等样子,也知道这是人们拿来享用、公认的宝物,但分不清“这是假币,这是精巧的,这是粗劣的,这是精美的”。大兑换商则连颜色等样子、宝物之相、假币等相全都知道。而且他在辨认时,即使只是见色、闻声、嗅香、尝味,或用手掂量轻重,也能知道“这是在某村造的”,也知道“这是在某镇、某城、某山阴、某河岸造的”,还知道“这是某位师父造的”。同样,想就像不懂事的小孩看金币,只依青等相而知道所缘而已。识就像村民看金币,既依青等相知道所缘,也能达到以无常等相通达特相。慧就像大兑换商看金币,既依青等相知道所缘,也能达到以无常等相通达特相,还能进一步使圣道显现。巴利
Yathā hi heraññikaphalake kahāpaṇarāsimhi kate ajātabuddhidārako gāmikapuriso mahāheraññikoti tīsu janesu oloketvā ṭhitesu ajātabuddhidārako kahāpaṇānaṃ cittavicittacaturassamaṇḍalādibhāvameva jānāti, ‘‘idaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ratanasammata’’nti na jānāti. Gāmikapuriso cittādibhāvañca jānāti, manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaratanasammatabhāvañca, ‘‘ayaṃ kūṭo, ayaṃ cheko, ayaṃ karaṭo, ayaṃ saṇho’’ti na jānāti. Mahāheraññiko cittādibhāvampi ratanasammatabhāvampi kūṭādibhāvampi jānāti. Jānanto ca pana rūpaṃ disvāpi saddaṃ sutvāpi gandhaṃ ghāyitvāpi rasaṃ sāyitvāpi hatthena garulahubhāvaṃ upadhāretvāpi ‘‘asukagāme kato’’tipi jānāti, ‘‘asukanigame asukanagare asukapabbatacchāyāya asukanadītīre kato’’tipi, ‘‘asukācariyena kato’’tipi jānāti. Evameva saññā ajātabuddhidārakassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇamattameva jānāti. Viññāṇaṃ gāmikapurisassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi jānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti. Paññā mahāheraññikassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi jānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvampi pāpeti.
不过,他们之间的这些差别很难看透。所以具寿那先犀那才这样说:巴利
So pana nesaṃ viseso duppaṭivijjho. Tenāha āyasmā nāgaseno –
“大王,世尊做了一件很难做到的事。”
“尊者那先,世尊做了什么很难做到的事?”
“大王,世尊做了一件很难做到的事:这些非色的心和心所法,在同一所缘上生起时,世尊把它们一一区分开来说明:‘这是触,这是受,这是想,这是思,这是心。’”巴利
‘‘Dukkaraṃ, mahārāja, bhagavatā katanti. Kiṃ, bhante nāgasena, bhagavatā dukkaraṃ katanti? Dukkaraṃ, mahārāja, bhagavatā kataṃ, imesaṃ arūpīnaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekārammaṇe vattamānānaṃ vavatthānaṃ akkhātaṃ ‘ayaṃ phasso, ayaṃ vedanā, ayaṃ saññā, ayaṃ cetanā, idaṃ citta’’’nti (mi. pa. 2.7.16).
就像把芝麻油、芥子油、蜂蜜油、蓖麻油、兽脂油这五种油倒进同一个罐子里,搅拌一整天,然后要一一挑出来,分辨出“这是芝麻油,这是芥子油”,这本来就很难;而要区分这些法,比这还更难。可是世尊因为彻底通达一切知智,是法的主宰、法的国王,所以能对这些非色的、在同一所缘上生起的法作出界定。这个道理也可以用五大河流入大海的地方来理解:即使一一挑出其中的水,说“这是恒河的水,这是耶牟那河的水”,也能了知这个道理。巴利
Yathā hi tilatelaṃ sāsapatelaṃ madhukatelaṃ eraṇḍakatelaṃ vasātelanti imāni pañca telāni ekacāṭiyaṃ pakkhipitvā divasaṃ yamakamanthe hi manthetvā tato ‘‘idaṃ tilatelaṃ, idaṃ sāsapatela’’nti ekekassa pāṭiyekkaṃ uddharaṇaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ, idaṃ tato dukkarataraṃ. Bhagavā pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa suppaṭividdhattā dhammissaro dhammarājā imesaṃ arūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ ekārammaṇe vattamānānaṃ vavatthānaṃ akāsi. Pañcannaṃ mahānadīnaṃ samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhāne ‘‘idaṃ gaṅgāya udakaṃ, idaṃ yamunāyā’’ti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ udakuddharaṇenāpi ayamattho veditabbo.
世尊先用第一段说明空,再用第二段说明空相,通过这两段讲了无我相之后,现在为了显示苦相,才说了“在此,诸比丘……”等话。其中,“被吞噬”并不是像狗一块块撕下肉来吃那样吞噬色;而是像穿着脏衣服的人,因为那件衣服带来压迫,就说“衣服在吞噬我”一样,这里也是因为产生压迫,所以应知称为“吞噬”。“成为行道者”,是指从持戒开始,一直到阿拉汉道的修行者。而在这里,那位智慧强、根性利、智慧超胜的瑜伽行者,在精勤用功时,即使被树桩或荆棘刺伤,被武器击中,或被老虎等抓住撕咬,也能把那种感受视为无关紧要,持续观照根本业处,从而证得阿拉汉果。像这样为了对感受厌离、离欲、灭尽而修行的人,就像吉达马喇长老、居士子大提须长老、在瓦达尼亚林野中那三十位比丘里在虎口下倒卧的那位比丘,以及被荆棘刺伤的那位长老一样。巴利
Iti paṭhamapabbena suññataṃ, dutiyena suññatālakkhaṇanti dvīhi pabbehi anattalakkhaṇaṃ kathetvā idāni dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ tatra, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha khajjāmīti na rūpaṃ sunakho viya maṃsaṃ luñcitvā luñcitvā khādati, yathā pana kiliṭṭhavatthanivattho tatonidānaṃ pīḷaṃ sandhāya ‘‘khādati maṃ vattha’’nti bhaṇati, evamidampi pīḷaṃ uppādentaṃ khādati nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Paṭipanno hotīti sīlaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattamaggā paṭipanno hoti. Yo panettha balavañāṇo tikkhabuddhi ñāṇuttaro yogāvacaro padhānabhūmiyaṃ vāyamanto khāṇunā vā kaṇṭakena vā viddho āvudhena vā pahaṭo byagghādīhi vā gahetvā khajjamāno taṃ vedanaṃ abbohārikaṃ katvā mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ sammasanto arahattameva gaṇhāti, ayaṃ vedanāya nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya paṭipanno nāma vuccati pītamallatthero viya kuṭumbiyaputtamahātissatthero viya vattaniaṭaviyaṃ tiṃsamattānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ aññataro byagghamukhe nipannabhikkhu viya kaṇṭakena viddhatthero viya ca.
据说,有十二位比丘在林中精勤修行,他们敲响板钟来安排作息。其中一位在太阳刚刚落山时敲了板钟,然后从经行道走下来,在经行时横着迈步,踩到了一根被草遮住的荆棘。那根荆棘从他脚背穿了出来。当时受生起的情形,就像被烧红的犁头穿透一样。长老心想:“我是把这根肉体上的荆棘拔出来,还是拔除那本来刺着的烦恼之刺?”他心里又想:“被这根荆棘刺着,总比在地狱等处受苦的恐惧要好;就拔除那本来刺着的烦恼之刺吧。”于是他把那种受当作无关紧要的事,整夜经行,天亮后才向另一位比丘示意。那位比丘过来问:“尊者,怎么了?”他说:“贤友,我被荆棘刺了。”又问:“尊者,什么时候刺的?”他说:“就是傍晚,贤友。”那位比丘说:“您为什么不叫我们呢?我们可以把荆棘拔出来,再涂上油啊。”他说:“贤友,我一直在努力拔除那本来刺着的烦恼之刺。”那位比丘说:“尊者,您拔出来了吗?”他说:“贤友,我只拔出来了一点点。”其余的事例,在《长部》注释和《中部》注释的《念处经》解说中已经详细讲过了。巴利
Dvādasasu kira bhikkhūsu ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā araññe padhānamanuyuñjantesu eko sūriye atthaṅgatamatteyeva ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā caṅkamaṃ oruyha caṅkamanto tiriyaṃ nimmathento tiṇapaṭicchannaṃ kaṇṭakaṃ akkami. Kaṇṭako piṭṭhipādena nikkhanto. Tattaphālena vinividdhakālo viya vedanā vattati. Thero cintesi – ‘‘kiṃ imaṃ kaṇṭakaṃ uddharāmi, udāhu pakatiyā vijjhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭaka’’nti? Tassa evamahosi – ‘‘iminā kaṇṭakena viddhattā nirayādīsu bhayaṃ nāma natthi, pakatiyā vijjhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭakaṃyevā’’ti. So taṃ vedanaṃ abbohārikaṃ katvā sabbarattiṃ caṅkamitvā vibhātāya rattiyā aññassa saññaṃ adāsi. So āgantvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante’’ti pucchi? ‘‘Kaṇṭakenamhi, āvuso, viddho’’ti. ‘‘Kāya velāya, bhante’’ti? ‘‘Sāyameva, āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Kasmā na amhe pakkosittha, kaṇṭakaṃ uddharitvā tattha telampi siñceyyāmā’’ti? ‘‘Pakatiyā vijjhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭakameva uddharituṃ vāyamimhā, āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Sakkuṇittha, bhante, uddharitu’’nti. ‘‘Ekadesamattena me, āvuso, uddhaṭo’’ti. Sesavatthūni dīghamajjhimaṭṭhakathāsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106) satipaṭṭhānasuttaniddese vitthāritāneva.
“你们怎么想,比丘们”这句话,为什么在这里开始说呢?因为在这一段里,只讲了苦相,没有讲无常相。为了显示无常相,所以从这里开始说。也是为了把三相合在一起显示,所以从这里开始说。“他减损,不积聚”,意思是摧毁轮回,不再积聚。“他舍断,不执取”,意思是把那些舍弃掉,不再抓取。“他消散,不聚合”,意思是令其散开,不再聚拢。“他熄灭,不点燃”,意思是令其止息,不再烧起来。巴利
Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhaveti kasmā āraddhaṃ? Imasmiṃ pabbe dukkhalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ, na aniccalakkhaṇaṃ. Taṃ dassetuṃ idamāraddhaṃ. Tīṇi lakkhaṇāni samodhānetvā dassetumpi āraddhameva. Apacināti no ācinātīti vaṭṭaṃ vināseti, neva cināti. Pajahati na upādiyatīti tadeva vissajjeti, na gaṇhāti. Visineti na ussinetīti vikirati na sampiṇḍeti. Vidhūpeti na sandhūpetīti nibbāpeti na jālāpeti.
“如此观察,诸比丘”这句话是为什么开始的?是为了显示那位已经摧毁轮回、安住不动的大漏尽者,所以才开始说这句话。或者,到这里为止讲的是观,现在为了连同观一起显示四道,所以开始说这句话。又或者,到这里为止讲的是第一道,现在为了连同观一起显示其余三道,所以开始说这句话。又或者,到这里为止讲的是三道,现在为了连同观一起显示阿罗汉道,所以也开始说这句话。巴利
Evaṃ passaṃ, bhikkhaveti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Vaṭṭaṃ vināsetvā ṭhitaṃ mahākhīṇāsavaṃ dassessāmīti āraddhaṃ. Ettakena vā ṭhānena vipassanā kathitā, idāni saha vipassanāya cattāro magge dassetuṃ idaṃ āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ettakena ṭhānena paṭhamamaggo kathito, idāni saha vipassanāya tayo magge dassetuṃ idamāraddhaṃ. Ettakena vā ṭhānena tīṇi maggāni kathitāni, idāni saha vipassanāya arahattamaggaṃ dassetumpi idaṃ āraddhameva.
与生主一起,就是和生主天王——帝释天——在一起。从远处就礼敬,意思是远远地就礼敬,即使被礼敬者站在远处也照样礼敬,就像人们礼敬尼陀长老那样。巴利
Sapajāpatikāti saddhiṃ pajāpatinā devarājena. Ārakāva namassantīti dūratova namassanti, dūrepi ṭhitaṃ namassantiyeva āyasmantaṃ nītattheraṃ viya.
据说,这位长老从弃花家族出家,就在剃刀锋下证得了阿罗汉果。他心想:“我今天刚出家,今天我的出家义务已达顶峰。我要去圆满那以对四种资具知足、乐于修行为庄严的大圣种修行之道。”于是,他为了拾取粪扫衣,进入舍卫城,四处寻找布片。这时,一位大梵天从禅定中出来,观察人间,看见长老,心想:“他今天刚出家,今天就在剃刀锋下证得阿罗汉果,为了圆满大圣种修行之道而在寻找布片。”于是合掌恭敬地站在那里。另一位大梵天看见后问道:“你在礼敬谁?”回答说:“我在礼敬尼陀长老。”“是什么原因?”“他今天刚出家,今天就在剃刀锋下证得阿罗汉果,为了圆满大圣种修行之道而在寻找布片。”那位大梵天也合掌礼敬,站在那里。接着,一位又一位,共有七百位大梵天都合掌礼敬站着。因此,这样说:巴利
Thero kira pupphacchaḍḍakakulato nikkhamma pabbajito, khuraggeyeva arahattaṃ patvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ ajjeva pabbajito ajjeva me pabbajitakiccaṃ matthakaṃ pattaṃ, catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmamaṇḍitaṃ mahāariyavaṃsapaṭipadaṃ pūressāmī’’ti. So paṃsukūlatthāya sāvatthiṃ pavisitvā coḷakaṃ pariyesanto vicari. Atheko mahābrahmā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya manussapathaṃ olokento theraṃ disvā – ‘‘ajjeva pabbajitvā ajjeva khuragge arahattaṃ patvā mahāariyavaṃsapaṭipadaṃ pūretuṃ coḷakaṃ pariyesatī’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha namassamāno aṭṭhāsi. Tamañño mahābrahmā disvā ‘‘kaṃ namassasī’’ti? Pucchi. Nītattheraṃ namassāmīti. Kiṃ kāraṇāti? Ajjeva pabbajitvā ajjeva khuragge arahattaṃ patvā mahāariyavaṃsapaṭipadaṃ pūretuṃ coḷakaṃ pariyesatīti. Sopi naṃ namassamāno aṭṭhāsi. Athañño, athaññoti sattasatā mahābrahmāno namassamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ –
那七百位尊贵的天神,
梵天从梵天宫殿出来,
那些内心清净的人,礼敬尼陀(长老)。
漏已尽的人拿起粪扫衣。
那七百位殊胜的天神,
梵天从梵天宫殿出来,
那些内心清净的人,礼敬已得解脱的圣者,
漏已尽的人在做粪扫衣。
漏已尽的人清洗粪扫衣。
漏已尽的人染粪扫衣。
漏已尽的人穿粪扫衣。巴利
‘‘Tā devatā sattasatā uḷārā, Brahmā vimānā abhinikkhamitvā; Nītaṃ namassanti pasannacittā, ‘Khīṇāsavo gaṇhati paṃsukūlaṃ’’’. ‘‘Tā devatā sattasatā uḷārā, Brahmā vimānā abhinikkhamitvā; Nītaṃ namassanti pasannacittā, ‘Khīṇāsavo kayirati paṃsukūlaṃ’’’. ‘‘‘Khīṇāsavo dhovati paṃsukūlaṃ’; ‘Khīṇāsavo rajati paṃsukūlaṃ’; ‘Khīṇāsavo pārupati paṃsakūla’’’nti.
就这样,世尊在这部经里,使教导从三有回转,把握住了阿罗汉果的顶点。教导结束时,五百位比丘立足于阿罗汉果。第七。巴利
Iti bhagavā imasmiṃ sutte desanaṃ tīhi bhavehi vinivattetvā arahattassa kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Desanāpariyosāne pañcasatā bhikkhū arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Sattamaṃ.
第八 富楼那经注释巴利
8. Piṇḍolyasuttavaṇṇanā
80 第八,“在任何某种事件中”是指在任何某种原因上。“驱遣”是指驱逐出去。那么,这些比丘是因为什么原因被世尊驱遣的呢?事情是这样的:有一次雨安居期间,世尊住在舍卫城,雨安居结束、自恣之后,由大比丘僧团围绕,从舍卫城出发,在各地游行,到了迦毗罗卫,进入榕树园。释迦族的王子们听说“导师来了”,午饭后便让人用上百担挑来许可用的油、蜂蜜、糖蜜等以及各种饮品,前往精舍,交给僧团,礼敬导师,问候寒暄之后,坐在一边。导师坐在那里,为他们讲说甜美的法义。就在那时,有些比丘在整理住处,有些在铺设床座等,沙弥们在清理地面。在分发物品的地方,有些比丘已经到了,有些还没到。已经到的比丘替还没到的领取利养,嘴里说着“给我们,给我们老师的,给我们亲教师的”,吵成一片。世尊听到后问长老:“阿难,那些高声大叫、像渔夫分鱼一样的人是谁?”长老把这件事禀告了。世尊听后说:“阿难,比丘们是为了利养才大声喧闹的。”“是的,尊者。”“阿难,这不合宜,不恰当。我并不是为了衣等资具,历经四阿僧祇劫又十万劫圆满诸波罗蜜;这些比丘也不是为了衣等资具,才从在家出家、过无家生活;他们出家是为了证得阿罗汉,却把无意义的事当成有意义,把没有价值的东西当成有价值的东西。阿难,去,把那些比丘驱遣出去。”巴利
80. Aṭṭhame kismiñcideva pakaraṇeti kismiñcideva kāraṇe. Paṇāmetvāti nīharitvā. Kismiṃ pana kāraṇe ete bhagavatā paṇāmitāti? Ekasmiñhi antovasse bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ vasitvā vutthavasso pavāretvā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro sāvatthito nikkhamitvā janapadacārikaṃ caranto kapilavatthuṃ patvā nigrodhārāmaṃ pāvisi. Sakyarājāno ‘‘satthā āgato’’ti sutvā pacchābhatte kappiyāni telamadhuphāṇitādīni ceva pānakāni ca kājasatehi gāhāpetvā vihāraṃ gantvā saṅghassa niyyātetvā satthāraṃ vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ karontā ekamante nisīdiṃsu. Satthā tesaṃ madhuradhammakathaṃ kathento nisīdi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe ekacce bhikkhū senāsanaṃ paṭijagganti, ekacce mañcapīṭhādīni paññāpenti, sāmaṇerā appaharitaṃ karonti. Bhājanīyaṭṭhāne sampattabhikkhūpi atthi, asampattabhikkhūpi atthi. Sampattā asampattānaṃ lābhaṃ gaṇhantā, ‘‘amhākaṃ detha, amhākaṃ ācariyassa detha upajjhāyassa dethā’’ti kathentā mahāsaddamakaṃsu. Satthā sutvā theraṃ pucchi ‘‘ke pana te, ānanda, uccāsaddā mahāsaddā kevaṭṭā maññe macchavilope’’ti? Thero etamatthaṃ ārocesi. Satthā sutvā ‘‘āmisahetu, ānanda, bhikkhū mahāsaddaṃ karontī’’ti āha. ‘‘Āma, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Ananucchavikaṃ, ānanda, appatirūpaṃ. Na hi mayā kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni cīvarādihetu pāramiyo pūritā, nāpi ime bhikkhū cīvarādihetu agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitā, arahattahetu pabbajitvā anatthaṃ atthasadisaṃ asāraṃ sārasadisaṃ karonti, gacchānanda, te bhikkhū paṇāmehī’’ti.
上午时,指的是第二天上午。在嫩毗楼树根下,指的是在幼小的毗楼树下面。被驱逐,意思是被赶走。也有写成被驱出的版本,意思一样,都是表示被赶出去的状态。可能会有变化,指的是信心的变化或者状态的变化。怎么说呢?当比丘们心想“我们因为一些微不足道的理由就被正自觉者赶走了”,信心因此变得薄弱,这就叫信心的变化。那些还保留着比丘的外相却前往外道住处的人,就叫状态的变化。可能会有变异,在这里是指:“我们出家是为了能够把握导师的意趣,如果把握不了,那我们出家又有什么用呢?”于是舍弃学处,还俗回去,应该知道这就是变异。小牛,指的是还在吃奶的小牛。变化,指的是枯萎的变化。因为吃奶的小牛见不到母亲,得不到奶,就会枯萎、颤抖、战栗。变异,指的是死亡。它得不到奶,因为渴求奶水而干枯,倒下死去。巴利
Pubbaṇhasamayanti dutiyadivase pubbaṇhasamayaṃ. Beluvalaṭṭhikāya mūleti taruṇabeluvarukkhamūle. Pabāḷhoti pabāhito. Pavāḷhotipi pāṭho, pavāhitoti attho. Ubhayampi nīhaṭabhāvameva dīpeti. Siyā aññathattanti pasādaññathattaṃ vā bhāvaññathattaṃ vā bhaveyya. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Sammāsambuddhena mayaṃ lahuke kāraṇe paṇāmitā’’ti pasādaṃ mandaṃ karontānaṃ pasādaññathattaṃ nāma hoti. Saliṅgeneva titthāyatanaṃ pakkamantānaṃ bhāvaññathattaṃ nāma. Siyā vipariṇāmoti ettha pana ‘‘mayaṃ satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gaṇhituṃ sakkhissāmāti pabbajitā, naṃ gahetuṃ asakkontānaṃ kiṃ amhākaṃ pabbajjāyā’’ti? Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattanaṃ vipariṇāmoti veditabbo. Vacchassāti khīrūpakavacchassa. Aññathattanti milāyanaaññathattaṃ. Khīrūpako hi vaccho mātu adassanena khīraṃ alabhanto milāyati kampati pavedhati. Vipariṇāmoti maraṇaṃ. So hi khīraṃ alabhamāno khīrapipāsāya sussanto patitvā marati.
“幼嫩的种子”是指那些已经发芽、需要靠水来滋养的种子。“变坏”就是枯萎、变坏。因为那些种子得不到水就会枯萎。“变异”就是毁灭。因为那些种子得不到水,就会干枯、毁灭,只剩下残秆。“得到扶持”是指既得到物质上的扶持,也得到法上的扶持。“应当扶持”是指应当用这两种扶持去扶持他们。因为刚出家的沙弥和年轻比丘,在缺少衣服等生活条件时,或者生病时,如果得不到导师、老师、亲教师给予物质上的扶持,就会疲惫不堪,无法读诵或作意;如果得不到法上的扶持,因为缺少教导和教诫,就会退失,无法避开不善、修习善法。但如果得到这两种扶持,身体就不会疲惫,能够持续读诵和作意,按照教导去做;即使后来得不到那种扶持,也能依靠先前所得到的扶持而获得力量,在教法中站稳。因此,世尊生起了这样的想法。巴利
Bījānaṃ taruṇānanti udakena anuggahetabbānaṃ virūḷhabījānaṃ. Aññathattanti milāyanaññathattameva. Tāni hi udakaṃ alabhantāni milāyanti. Vipariṇāmoti vināso. Tāni hi udakaṃ alabhantāni sukkhitvā vinassanti, palālameva honti. Anuggahitoti āmisānuggahena ceva dhammānuggahena ca anuggahito. Anuggaṇheyyanti dvīhipi etehi anuggahehi anuggaṇheyyaṃ. Acirapabbajitā hi sāmaṇerā ceva daharabhikkhū ca cīvarādipaccayavekalle vā sati gelaññe vā satthārā vā ācariyupajjhāyehi vā āmisānuggahena ananuggahitā kilamantā na sakkonti sajjhāyaṃ vā manasikāraṃ vā kātuṃ, dhammānuggahena ananuggahitā uddesena ceva ovādānusāsaniyā ca parihāyamānā na sakkonti akusalaṃ parivajjetvā kusalaṃ bhāvetuṃ. Imehi pana dvīhi anuggahehi anuggahitā kāyena akilamantā sajjhāyamanasikāre pavattitvā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamānā aparabhāge taṃ anuggahaṃ alabhantāpi teneva purimānuggahena laddhabalā sāsane patiṭṭhahanti, tasmā bhagavato evaṃ parivitakko udapādi.
大梵天出现在世尊面前,是因为他了知世尊的心念,心想:“这些比丘已被世尊遣散,现在世尊想给他们帮助,所以这样思量着。世尊在思量其中的缘由,我要在这件事上出一份力。”于是他便显现在世尊面前。这里的“有比丘”一句,是说这位大梵天就像一位善巧的厨师,把国王喜欢的酸味等种种味道,经过精心调配做得更加美味,第二天再呈上去一样;他凭着自己的善巧,把世尊所举的譬喻,用“世尊,正是如此”等话语加以组织铺陈,向世尊恳求,目的是为了帮助比丘僧团。其中,“请欢喜”的意思是“愿比丘僧团来到我身边”。这样满怀欢喜地迎接他们到来,就是“欢喜”的意思。“请说话”是指当他们来了以后,给予教诫和教导,就是“说话”的意思。巴利
Bhagavato purato pāturahosīti satthu cittaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ime bhikkhū bhagavatā paṇāmitā, idāni nesaṃ anuggahaṃ kātukāmo evaṃ cintesi, kāraṇaṃ bhagavā cintesi, ahamettha ussāhaṃ janessāmī’’ti purato pākaṭo ahosi. Santettha bhikkhūti idaṃ so mahābrahmā yathā nāma byatto sūdo yadeva ambilaggādīsu rasajātaṃ rañño ruccati, taṃ abhisaṅkhārena sādutaraṃ katvā punadivase upanāmeti, evameva attano byattatāya bhagavatā āhaṭaupamaṃyeva evametaṃ bhagavātiādivacanehi abhisaṅkharitvā bhagavantaṃ yācanto bhikkhusaṅghassa anuggahakaraṇatthaṃ vadati . Tattha abhinandatūti ‘‘mama santikaṃ bhikkhusaṅgho āgacchatū’’ti. Evamassa āgamanaṃ sampiyāyamāno abhinandatu. Abhivadatūti āgatassa ca ovādānusāsaniṃ dadanto abhivadatu.
“独处”就是独自一人。“施展神通”就是显现神通。所谓“或独行、或结伴”,就是有时一个人,有时两个人两个人地出现。“带着羞惭的样子”,就是内心怀着惭愧、感到害怕。
那么,世尊为什么要施展神通,让他们那样前来呢?是为了他们的利益。因为如果他们成群结队地来,就会嘲笑说:“世尊把比丘僧团打发走,自己进了山林,结果连一天都待不住,急急忙忙就回来了。”这样一来,他们对佛陀的恭敬心就生不起来,也没能力接受佛法开示。但如果他们心怀恐惧、带着惭愧,或独行、或结伴地前来,那么对佛陀的恭敬心就能生起,也能接受佛法开示了。世尊这样考虑之后,为了他们的利益,便施展了那样的神通。巴利
Paṭisallānāti ekībhāvā. Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkhāsīti iddhiṃ akāsi. Ekadvīhikāyāti ekeko ceva dve dve ca hutvā. Sārajjamānarūpāti ottappamānasabhāvā bhāyamānā. Kasmā pana bhagavā tesaṃ tathā upasaṅkamanāya iddhimakāsīti? Hitapatthanāya. Yadi hi te vaggavaggā hutvā āgaccheyyuṃ, ‘‘bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paṇāmetvā araññaṃ paviṭṭho ekadivasampi tattha vasituṃ nāsakkhi, vegeneva āgato’’ti keḷimpi kareyyuṃ. Atha nesaṃ neva buddhagāravaṃ paccupaṭṭhaheyya, na dhammadesanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ samatthā bhaveyyuṃ. Sabhayānaṃ pana sasārajjānaṃ ekadvīhikāya āgacchantānaṃ buddhagāravañceva paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati, dhammadesanañca sampaṭicchituṃ sakkhissantīti cintetvā tesaṃ hitapatthanāya tathārūpaṃ iddhiṃ akāsi.
“坐下”是说:当那些心怀畏惧、面带怯色的人走过来时,有一位比丘心想:“导师只看着我,大概只想责备我一个人吧。”于是轻轻走上前,顶礼后坐下。接着另一个、又一个,就这样五百位比丘都坐了下来。导师看到比丘僧团这样坐着,像无波的大海,又像无风处的灯火一样静止不动,便想:“对这些比丘,什么样的说法才合适呢?”随后他心里这样想:“这些人是因饮食之事被遣走的,关于乞食的教法才适合他们。先开示这个,然后再为他们讲更上的三转法轮之教。说法结束时,他们全都会证得阿罗汉果。”于是,他为他们开示那教法,开口说道:“诸比丘,这是末端……”等等。巴利
Nisīdiṃsūti tesu hi sārajjamānarūpesu āgacchantesu eko bhikkhu ‘‘mamaṃyeva satthā oloketi, maṃyeva maññe niggaṇhitukāmo’’ti saṇikaṃ āgantvā vanditvā nisīdi, athañño athaññoti evaṃ pañcabhikkhusatāni nisīdiṃsu. Evaṃ nisinnaṃ pana bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sīdantare sannisinnaṃ mahāsamuddaṃ viya nivāte padīpaṃ viya ca niccalaṃ disvā satthā cintesi – ‘‘imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kīdisī dhammadesanā vaṭṭatī’’ti? Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ime āhārahetu paṇāmitā, piṇḍiyālopadhammadesanāva nesaṃ sappāyā, taṃ dassetvā matthake tiparivaṭṭadesanaṃ desessāmi, desanāpariyosāne sabbe arahattaṃ pāpuṇissantī’’ti. Atha nesaṃ taṃ dhammadesanaṃ desento antamidaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha.
在这里,“末端”是指最低劣、最差劲的。“也就是乞食行”说的是,像这样靠乞讨食物来维持生活的人的活法。这里再解释词义:为了团食而到处走,所以叫“乞士”;乞士的行为就是“乞食行”,意思是靠乞讨食物来维持生命。“诅咒”就是辱骂。因为人生气的时候会骂自己的对头:“他会披上僧衣、拿着瓦钵,到处讨饭去!”或者骂:“你这么强壮、这么有干劲,怎么丢掉了惭愧心,像个可怜虫一样拿着钵到处乞食游荡,你到底有什么见不得人的事?”这也是辱骂。而这样的诅咒,同样也落在乞食行上。“善男子依义利而亲近”:在我这个教法里,不论是出身善男子,还是品行如善男子的人,都是有目标、有理由,本着目的、依着原因来亲近的。巴利
Tattha antanti pacchimaṃ lāmakaṃ. Yadidaṃ piṇḍolyanti yaṃ evaṃ piṇḍapariyesanena jīvikaṃ kappentassa jīvitaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – piṇḍāya ulatīti piṇḍolo, piṇḍolassa kammaṃ piṇḍolyaṃ, piṇḍapariyesanena nipphāditajīvitanti attho. Abhisāpoti akkoso. Kupitā hi manussā attano paccatthikaṃ ‘‘cīvaraṃ nivāsetvā kapālaṃ gahetvā piṇḍaṃ pariyesamāno carissatī’’ti akkosanti. Atha vā pana ‘‘kiṃ tuyhaṃ akātabbaṃ atthi, yo tvaṃ evaṃ balavā vīriyasampannopi hirottappaṃ pahāya kapaṇo viya piṇḍolo vicarasi pattapāṇī’’ti? Evampi akkosantiyeva. Tañca kho etanti evaṃ taṃ abhisāpaṃ samānampi piṇḍolyaṃ. Kulaputtā upenti atthavasikāti mama sāsane jātikulaputtā ca ācārakulaputtā ca atthavasikā kāraṇavasikā hutvā kāraṇavasaṃ paṭicca upenti.
在“被国王所逼迫”等说法中:有些人吃了国王的东西,被国王关进牢里,后来逃出来出家,这些人就叫“被国王所逼迫”。因为他们是被国王抓去捆绑的,所以叫“被国王所逼迫”。还有些人在森林里被盗贼抓住,当一部分人被杀害时,另一部分人说:“主人,我们被你们放走以后,不会回家过日子,而是要出家。我们在那里做任何供养佛陀等功德,都会把这份功德回向给你们。”他们被放走后就去出家,这些人就叫“被盗贼所逼迫”。他们也是因为被盗贼施加了本该被杀的命运,所以叫“被盗贼所逼迫”。还有些人借了债却还不起,逃出来出家,这些人就叫“被债所逼”,意思是被债务压迫。也有人读作“陷于债者”,意思是处在债务当中。有些人被国王、盗贼、饥荒、疾病这些恐惧中的某一种压倒、折磨而出家,这些人就叫“被恐惧所逼”,意思是被恐惧压迫。也有人读作“陷于恐惧者”,意思是处在恐惧当中。“为活命所困者”,就是被生计所困、被压倒,没办法养活妻子儿女的人。“我们已陷入”,就是指已经落入这些困境之中了。巴利
Rājābhinītātiādīsu ye rañño santakaṃ khāditvā raññā bandhanāgāre bandhāpitā palāyitvā pabbajanti, te rājābhinītā nāma. Te hi raññā bandhanaṃ abhinītattā rājābhinītā nāma. Ye pana corehi aṭaviyaṃ gahetvā ekaccesu māriyamānesu ekacce ‘‘mayaṃ sāmi tumhehi vissaṭṭhā gehaṃ anajjhāvasitvā pabbajissāma, tattha yaṃ yaṃ buddhapūjādipuññaṃ karissāma, tato tumhākaṃ pattiṃ dassāmā’’ti tehi vissaṭṭhā pabbajanti, te corābhinītā nāma. Tepi hi corehi māretabbataṃ abhinītāti corābhinītā nāma. Ye pana iṇaṃ gahetvā paṭidātuṃ asakkontā palāyitvā pabbajanti, te iṇaṭṭā nāma, iṇapīḷitāti attho . Iṇaṭṭhātipi pāṭho, iṇe ṭhitāti attho. Ye rājacorachātakarogabhayānaṃ aññatarena abhibhūtā upaddutā pabbajanti, te bhayaṭṭā nāma, bhayapīḷitāti attho. Bhayaṭṭhātipi pāṭho, bhaye ṭhitāti attho. Ājīvikāpakatāti ājīvikāya upaddutā abhibhūtā, puttadāraṃ posetuṃ asakkontāti attho. Otiṇṇāmhāti anto anupaviṭṭhā.
他成了有贪欲的人,这一段是为了说明:那位良家子当初生起“我要终结痛苦”这样的心念而出家,后来却做不到继续保持那样的出家状态。其中,“有贪欲”是指贪图别人的东西。“有强烈的染着”是指贪染很厚重。“有嗔恚心”是指内心腐败变坏。“有邪恶的意图”是指像长了锋利犄角的公牛一样,心地凶狠。“失念者”是指像把饭丢在一边的乌鸦一样,正念丢失了——在这里做的事,到那里就忘了。“不正知者”是指没有智慧,对五蕴等法缺乏辨别能力。“无定者”是指像被绑在急流中的船一样,因为没有近行定和安止定,内心无法安定。“散乱心者”是指像爬上围栏的野兽一样,内心慌乱不安。“放纵根门者”是指像在家人看着自己的儿女那样,不加防护,对六根不加以收摄。巴利
So ca hoti abhijjhālūti idaṃ so kulaputto ‘‘dukkhassa antaṃ karissāmī’’tiādivasena cittaṃ uppādetvā pabbajito, aparabhāge, taṃ pabbajjaṃ tathārūpaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhālūti parabhaṇḍānaṃ abhijjhāyitā. Tibbasārāgoti bahalarāgo. Byāpannacittoti pūtibhāvena vipannacitto. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappoti tikhiṇasiṅgo viya goṇo duṭṭhacitto. Muṭṭhassatīti bhattanikkhittakāko viya naṭṭhassati, idha kataṃ ettha nassati. Asampajānoti nippañño. Khandhādiparicchedarahito. Asamāhitoti caṇḍasote baddhanāvā viya upacārappanābhāvena asaṇṭhito. Vibbhantacittoti bandhāruḷhamago viya santamano. Pākatindriyoti yathā gihī puttadhītaro olokento asaṃvutindriyo hoti, evaṃ asaṃvutindriyo.
“焚尸火把”是指在焚烧尸体的地方的火把。两头燃烧、中间沾满粪便:大小约八指长,两头都在燃烧,中间却涂满了粪便。“既不于村落……”:如果它能被拿来用作轭、犁辕、椽子、翅木、销钉之类的东西,那它就能在村落里发挥木材之用;如果它能被拿来用作田间小屋的木床、木架之类的东西,那它就能在山林里发挥木材之用。但正因为这两种用途都派不上,所以才这样说。“又失去了在家人的财富享受”:意思是说,如果他在俗家生活,当家人分配遗产时他本应得到的那份财富享受,他也已经失去了。“以及沙门的利益”:意思是说,遵从亲教师与依止师的教诲,通过教理通达与修行证悟所应得的沙门利益。然而,导师举这个比喻,并不是针对破戒的人,而是针对那些戒行清净却懒惰、被贪欲等过失所损害的人而说的。巴利
Chavālātanti chavānaṃ daḍḍhaṭṭhāne alātaṃ. Ubhatopadittaṃ majjhe gūthagatanti pamāṇena aṭṭhaṅgulamattaṃ dvīsu ṭhānesu ādittaṃ majjhe gūthamakkhitaṃ. Neva gāmeti sace hi taṃ yuganaṅgalagopānasipakkhapāsakādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ sakkā assa, gāme kaṭṭhatthaṃ phareyya. Sace khettakuṭiyaṃ kaṭṭhattharamañcakādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ sakkā, araññe kaṭṭhatthaṃ phareyya. Yasmā pana ubhayathāpi na sakkā, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Gihibhogā ca parihīnoti yo agāre vasantehi gihīhi dāyajje bhājiyamāne bhogo laddhabbo assa, tato ca parihīno. Sāmaññatthañcāti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā pariyattipaṭivedhavasena pattabbaṃ sāmaññatthañca. Imañca pana upamaṃ satthā na dussīlassa vasena āhari, parisuddhasīlassa pana alasassa abhijjhādīhi dosehi upahatassa puggalassa imaṃ upamaṃ āhari.
“诸比丘,有这三种……”为什么开始说这个呢?是为了说明:这个人像焚尸火把一样的性质,不是父母造成的,也不是亲教师和依止师造成的,而是由这些恶寻造成的。“或者无相定”:指的是毗婆舍那定。因为它通过根除常相等(执著),所以被称为无相。在这里应当明白:有时四种念处是兼备的,无相定是前行部分;或者无相定是兼备的,四种念处是前行部分。巴利
Tayome, bhikkhaveti kasmā āraddhaṃ? Imassa puggalassa chavālātasadisabhāvo neva mātāpitūhi kato, na ācariyupajjhāyehi, imehi pana pāpavitakkehi katoti dassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Animittaṃ vā samādhinti vipassanāsamādhiṃ. So hi niccanimittādīnaṃ samugghātanena animittoti vuccati. Ettha ca cattāro satipaṭṭhānā missakā, animittasamādhi pubbabhāgo. Animittasamādhi vā missako, satipaṭṭhānā pubbabhāgāti veditabbā.
比丘们,有这两种见——这句话之所以要说,不只是为了表明修习无相定能断除这三种大寻,更是为了说明它也能彻底根除常见和断见。“我就没有过失了”,意思是“我将会成为没有过失的人”。这里剩下的内容都很浅显易懂。就这样,世尊在这部经里,以三种有来引导说法,最终以阿拉汉果为顶点收摄。说法结束时,五百位比丘连同无碍解一起证得了阿拉汉果。第八。巴利
Dvemā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiyoti idaṃ pana na kevalaṃ animittasamādhibhāvanā imesaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ mahāvitakkānaṃ pahānāya saṃvattati, sassatucchedadiṭṭhīnampi pana samugghātaṃ karotīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Na vajjavā assanti niddoso bhaveyyaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Iti bhagavā imasmimpi sutte desanaṃ tīhi bhavehi vinivattetvā arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Desanāvasāne pañcasatā bhikkhū saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsūti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
《巴利雷亚经》的注释巴利
9. Pālileyyasuttavaṇṇanā
81 81. 第九经的注释中说到“出发游行”:憍赏弥的比丘们争吵的时候,导师有一天引用了憍萨罗国长寿王的故事,用“怨仇确实不能靠怨仇平息”等偈颂来教导他们。那一天,他们整夜都在争吵,直到天亮。第二天,世尊又讲了同一个故事。那一天,他们还是整夜争吵到天亮。第三天,世尊又讲了同一个故事。这时,有一位比丘对世尊这样说:“尊者,请世尊少管闲事,安住在现法乐住中吧。我们凭这场争吵、争执、纷争、辩论就能出名了。”导师心想:“这些愚人的心已经被彻底蒙蔽了,没办法让他们明白。”于是又想:“我跟这些人有什么关系?我要独自居住,过独处的生活。”清晨,他整理好身体,在憍赏弥乞食之后,没有告诉任何人,就独自一人、没有同伴地出发游行了。巴利
81. Navame cārikaṃ pakkāmīti kosambikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kalahakāle satthā ekadivasaṃ dīghītissa kosalarañño vatthuṃ āharitvā ‘‘na hi verena verāni, sammantīdha kudācana’’ntiādīhi (dha. pa. 5) gāthāhi ovadati. Taṃdivasaṃ tesaṃ kalahaṃ karontānaṃyeva ratti vibhātā. Dutiyadivasepi bhagavā tameva vatthuṃ kathesi. Taṃdivasampi tesaṃ kalahaṃ karontānaṃyeva ratti vibhātā. Tatiyadivasepi bhagavā tameva vatthuṃ kathesi. Atha naṃ aññataro bhikkhu evamāha – ‘‘appossukko, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ anuyutto viharatu, mayametena bhaṇḍanena kalahena viggahena vivādena paññāyissāmā’’ti. Satthā ‘‘pariyādiṇṇarūpacittā kho ime moghapurisā, na ime sakkā saññāpetu’’nti cintetvā – ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ imehi, ekacāravāsaṃ vasissāmī’’ti? So pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā kosambiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā kañcipi anāmantetvā ekova adutiyo cārikaṃ pakkāmi.
贤友,关于“在那个时候”这一句,这位长老之所以这样说,是因为他完全知道、清楚、亲眼现见世尊今天的全部行踪——今天世尊会和一位比丘一起出发,今天会和两位,今天会和一百位,今天会和一千位,今天则独自一人。巴利
Yasmiṃ, āvuso, samayeti idaṃ thero yasmāssa ajja bhagavā ekena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ pakkamissati, ajja dvīhi, ajja satena, ajja sahassena, ajja ekakovāti sabbo bhagavato cāro vidito pākaṭo paccakkho, tasmā āha.
次第地:他沿着村庄和城镇的顺序,挨家挨户乞食游行。他想去见那位当时正独自安居的比丘,便去了巴罗加洛那迦罗村。在那里,他向跋古长老讲了整个午后以及三夜时分独住的好处。第二天,他带着那位随行沙门去乞食,之后让他就地留下,心想:“我要去东竹林鹿野见那三位和睦共住的善男子。”他同样向他们讲了整个午后以及三夜时分独住的好处,然后也让他们就地留下,自己一个人朝巴利雷亚城的方向出发,一路次第而行,到达了巴利雷亚城。因此经中说:“次第游行,到达了巴利雷亚。”巴利
Anupubbenāti gāmanigamapaṭipāṭiyā piṇḍāya caramāno ekacāravāsaṃ tāva vasamānaṃ bhikkhuṃ passitukāmo hutvā bālakaloṇakāragāmaṃ agamāsi. Tattha bhaguttherassa sakalapacchābhattañceva tiyāmarattiñca ekacāravāse ānisaṃsaṃ kathetvā punadivase tena pacchāsamaṇena piṇḍāya caritvā taṃ tattheva nivattetvā ‘‘samaggavāsaṃ vasamāne tayo kulaputte passissāmī’’ti pācīnavaṃsamigadāyaṃ agamāsi. Tesampi sakalapacchābhattañceva tiyāmarattiñca ekacāravāse ānisaṃsaṃ kathetvā te tattheva nivattetvā ekakova pālileyya nagarābhimukho pakkamitvā anupubbena pālileyyanagaraṃ sampatto. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anupubbena cārikaṃ caramāno yena pālileyyakaṃ, tadavasarī’’ti.
在“极妙沙罗树下”:巴利雷亚的居民们供养世尊之后,在离巴利雷亚不远的地方,有一片叫“守护林”的树林。他们在那里为世尊搭了一座树叶茅屋,让世尊答应“请住在这里”,然后请世尊住了下来。而“极妙沙罗”是那里一棵讨人喜欢、长得又好的沙罗树。世尊依止那座城,住在那片树林里、茅屋附近的那棵树下。因此说“在极妙沙罗树下”。巴利
Bhaddasālamūleti pālileyyavāsino bhagavato dānaṃ datvā pālileyyato avidūre rakkhitavanasaṇḍo nāma atthi, tattha bhagavato paṇṇasālaṃ katvā ‘‘ettha vasathā’’ti paṭiññaṃ kāretvā vāsayiṃsu. Bhaddasālo pana tattheko manāpo laddhako sālarukkho. Bhagavā taṃ nagaraṃ upanissāya tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe paṇṇasālasamīpe tasmiṃ rukkhamūle viharati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhaddasālamūle’’ti.
如来这样住在这里的时候,有一头象王被母象、小象等众象在觅食地、饮水处、沐浴处等地挤来挤去,对象群感到厌倦,心想:“我跟这些象待在一起有什么意思?”它离开象群,走上人走的路,在巴利雷亚的密林里见到世尊,就像一千壶水浇灭了身上的燥热一样,顿时清凉下来,站在导师身边。从那时起,它就开始侍奉导师,做该做的事:送上洗脸水,打来洗澡水,递上齿木,打扫住处,还从林中采来各种甜美的果实献给世尊。世尊就享用了。巴利
Evaṃ viharante panettha tathāgate aññataro hatthināgo hatthinīhi hatthipotakādīhi gocarabhūmititthogāhanādīsu ubbāḷho yūthe ukkaṇṭhito ‘‘kiṃ me imehi hatthīhī’’ti? Yūthaṃ pahāya manussapathaṃ gacchanto pālileyyakavanasaṇḍe bhagavantaṃ disvā ghaṭasahassena nibbāpitasantāpo viya nibbuto hutvā satthu santike aṭṭhāsi. So tato paṭṭhāya satthu vattapaṭivattaṃ karonto mukhadhovanaṃ deti, nhānodakaṃ āharati, dantakaṭṭhaṃ deti, pariveṇaṃ sammajjati, araññato madhurāni phalāphalāni āharitvā satthuno deti. Satthā paribhogaṃ karoti.
有一天,导师在夜分刚过时经行,然后坐在一块石板上。不远处也站着一头大象。导师向后看,什么也没看见;向前和两侧看,也是如此。这时他心里生起一个念头:“我离开了那些爱争吵的家伙,独自住着,真是快乐!”那头大象也在想:“没有别的象来吃我压弯的树枝了……”等等,它心里也生起这样的念头:“我独自住着真是快乐,还能为导师尽义务。”导师观察自己的心之后,心想:“我的心是这样,那头大象的心又是怎样呢?”发现它的心也一样,于是说出这句优陀那:“我们的心彼此契合。”巴利
Ekadivasaṃ satthā rattibhāgasamanantare caṅkamitvā pāsāṇaphalake nisīdi. Hatthīpi avidūre ṭhāne aṭṭhāsi. Satthā pacchato oloketvā na kiñci addasa, evaṃ purato ca ubhayapassesu ca. Athassa ‘‘sukhaṃ vatāhaṃ aññatra tehi bhaṇḍanakārakehi vasāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajji. Hatthinopi ‘‘mayā nāmitasākhaṃ aññe khādantā natthī’’tiādīni cintetvā – ‘‘sukhaṃ vata ekakova vasāmi, satthu vattaṃ kātuṃ labhāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajji. Satthā attano cittaṃ oloketvā – ‘‘mama tāva īdisaṃ cittaṃ, kīdisaṃ nu kho hatthissā’’ti tassāpi tādisameva disvā ‘‘sameti no citta’’nti imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
这是那伽以那伽之身,那头犁辕长牙的大象,
心与心相互契合,如同一人独处林中享乐。巴利
‘‘Etaṃ nāgassa nāgena, īsādantassa hatthino; Sameti cittaṃ cittena, yadeko ramatī vane’’ti. (mahāva. 467);
那时,有五百位在各地雨安居结束后前来的比丘。他们听说“导师把比丘僧团遣散,自己进入山林了”,但因为自身的法性,无法直接去导师跟前,于是便前往具寿阿难那里。巴利
Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhūti atha evaṃ tathāgate tattha viharante pañcasatā disāsu vassaṃvutthā bhikkhū. Yenāyasmā ānandoti ‘‘satthā kira bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paṇāmetvā araññaṃ paviṭṭho’’ti attano dhammatāya satthu santikaṃ gantuṃ asakkontā yenāyasmā ānando, tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.
“无间”是指诸漏的灭尽,也就是紧接道之后生起的阿拉汉果。“简择”是通过简择,即以能够辨别那些法各自本性的智慧来界定,这就是它的含义。“法”是指教法。“四念处”等,是为了说明那些经过如此界定之后而被宣说的法的各个部分。“随观”是指邪见的随观。“那个行”是指邪见之行。“那个行从那里生起”是指那个行从那个渴爱生起。在与渴爱相应的四种心中,这个行也会生起。“那个渴爱”是指作为邪见行之因的那个渴爱。“那个受”是指作为渴爱之缘的那个受。“那个触”是指作为受之缘的无明触。“那个无明”是指与触相应的无明。巴利
Anantarāāsavānaṃ khayoti maggānantaraṃ arahattaphalaṃ. Vicayasoti vicayena, tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvavicinanasamatthena ñāṇena paricchinditvāti attho. Dhammoti sāsanadhammo. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānātiādi ye ye koṭṭhāse paricchinditvā dhammo desito, tesaṃ pakāsanatthāya vuttaṃ. Samanupassanāti diṭṭhisamanupassanā. Saṅkhāro soti diṭṭhisaṅkhāro so. Tatojo so saṅkhāroti tato taṇhāto so saṅkhāro jāto. Taṇhāsampayuttesu cittesupi catūsu cittesu esa jāyati. Sāpi taṇhāti sā diṭṭhisaṅkhārassa paccayabhūtā taṇhā. Sāpi vedanāti sā taṇhāya paccayabhūtā vedanā. Sopi phassoti so vedanāya paccayo avijjāsamphasso. Sāpi avijjāti sā phassasampayuttā avijjā.
“我不存在,我的资具也不存在”:如果我不存在,我的资具也不会存在。“我将不存在,我的(资具)也将不存在”:如果未来我也不存在,那么我的资具也将不存在。在这些地方,世尊为了让那位比丘放下他所执取的种种邪见而前来,他的教说既随顺听法者的根性,也展现了教法的善巧。关于“那个行从那里生起”:与贪爱相应的心中没有疑,那疑行怎么会从贪爱生起呢?因为贪爱还没有被断除。也就是说,对于贪爱尚未断除的人来说,那疑行就会生起,这是针对这种情况说的。对于见,也同样可以这样理解。因为在四种心生起的情形中,并没有与心相应的见,但由于贪爱还没有被断除,那见就会生起,因此针对这种情况,这样理解也是合理的。如此,在这部经中,说到在二十三种情形下证得阿拉汉果之后,又开示了观。第九。巴利
No cassaṃ, no ca me siyāti sace ahaṃ na bhaveyyaṃ, mama parikkhāropi na bhaveyya. Nābhavissaṃ, na me bhavissatīti sace pana āyatimpi ahaṃ na bhavissāmi, evaṃ mama parikkhāropi na bhavissati. Ettake ṭhāne bhagavā tena bhikkhunā gahitagahitadiṭṭhiṃ vissajjāpento āgato puggalajjhāsayenapi desanāvilāsenapi. Tatojo so saṅkhāroti taṇhāsampayuttacitte vicikicchāva natthi, kathaṃ vicikicchāsaṅkhāro taṇhāto jāyatīti? Appahīnattā. Yassa hi taṇhāya appahīnāya so uppajjati, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhiyāpi eseva nayo labbhatiyeva catūsu hi cittuppādesu sampayuttadiṭṭhi nāma natthi. Yasmā pana taṇhāya appahīnattā sā uppajjati, tasmā taṃ sandhāya tatrāpi ayamattho yujjati. Iti imasmiṃ sutte tevīsatiyā ṭhānesu arahattaṃ pāpetvā vipassanā kathitā. Navamaṃ.
10. 《满月经》的注释巴利
10. Puṇṇamasuttavaṇṇanā
82 第十经里“在那布萨日”等话,在《自恣经》的注释中已经详细解释过了。“开示一些什么”,意思是开示某种缘由。世尊为什么说“坐在自己的座位上,等你想问的时候再问”?据说,那位比丘身边跟着五百位比丘。如果老师站着提问,这些比丘要是坐下,就变成尊敬世尊却不尊敬老师;要是都站起来,又变成尊敬老师却不尊敬世尊。这样一来,他们的心就会散乱,没法专心领受教法。但如果老师先坐下再提问,他们的心就能专一,能够领受教法。世尊知道这一点,所以才那样说。“尊者,这些就是吗?”这位长老是五百位比丘的老师,不能说他不了解五蕴本身。不过,提问的人不应该摆出“我已经知道‘这些就是五取蕴,没有别的’”这种姿态来问,所以他就像不知道一样地提问。他的弟子们也会想:“我们的老师不会直接说‘我知道’,他是跟一切知智对照之后才说的。”因此认为这话值得听、值得信。正因为这样,他也像不知道一样地提问。巴利
82. Dasame tadahuposathetiādi pavāraṇasutte vitthāritameva. Kiñcideva desanti kiñci kāraṇaṃ. Sake āsane nisīditvā puccha yadākaṅkhasīti kasmā evamāha? So kira bhikkhu pañcasatabhikkhuparivāro. Ācariye pana ṭhitake pucchante sace te bhikkhū nisīdanti, satthari gāravaṃ kataṃ hoti, ācariye agāravaṃ. Sace uṭṭhahanti, ācariye gāravaṃ kataṃ hoti, satthari agāravaṃ. Iti nesaṃ cittaṃ anekaggaṃ bhavissati, desanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ na sakkhissanti. Tasmiṃ pana nisīditvā pucchante tesaṃ cittaṃ ekaggaṃ bhavissati, desanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ sakkhissantīti ñatvā bhagavā evamāha. Ime nu kho, bhanteti ayaṃ thero pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ ācariyo, pañcakkhandhamattampi nappajānātīti na vattabbo. Pañhaṃ pucchantena pana ‘‘ime pañcupādānakkhandhā, na aññe’’ti evaṃ jānantena viya hutvā pucchituṃ na vaṭṭati, tasmā ajānanto viya pucchati. Tepi cassa antevāsikā ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo ‘ahaṃ jānāmī’ti na katheti, sabbaññutaññāṇena pana saddhiṃ saṃsanditvāva kathetī’’ti sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ maññissantītipi ajānanto viya pucchati.
“以欲为根”,就是以渴爱之欲为根本。“比丘,那执取并不就是那五取蕴”——因为仅仅欲贪并不就是五蕴,所以这样说。又因为无论从俱生还是从所缘来看,离开了诸蕴就没有执取,所以说“执取也不在五取蕴之外”。当与渴爱相应的心生起时,那心所生的色法就是色蕴,除了那渴爱之外,其余的非色法就是受、想、行、识四蕴。这样,从俱生的角度说,离开诸蕴就没有执取。而执取是以色等当中的某一种为所缘而生起的,所以从所缘的角度说,离开五蕴也没有执取。“欲贪的差别”,就是欲贪的种种不同。“比丘们,正是这样”:意思是,由于对以色为所缘的欲贪不把受等中的某一种作为所缘,就会有欲贪的差别。“蕴的施设”,就是“蕴”这个名称。这里前后文的连结虽然接不上,但即使接不上,提问本身仍有其连结,回答也有其连结。因为这位长老是随着那些比丘各自的意乐而提问,导师也是随着他们各自的意乐而回答。其余各处都很清楚。第十。巴利
Chandamūlakāti taṇhāchandamūlakā. Na kho bhikkhu taññeva upādānaṃ te pañcupādānakkhandhāti yasmā chandarāgamattaṃ pañcakkhandhā na hoti, tasmā idaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana sahajātato vā ārammaṇato vā khandhe muñcitvā upādānaṃ natthi, tasmā nāpi aññatra pañcahiupādānakkhandhehi upādānanti vuttaṃ. Taṇhāsampayuttasmiñhi citte vattamāne taṃcittasamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ rūpakkhandho, ṭhapetvā taṃ taṇhaṃ sesā arūpadhammā cattāro khandhāti sahajātatopi khandhe muñcitvā upādānaṃ natthi. Upādānassa pana rūpādīsu aññataraṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjanato ārammaṇatopi pañcakkhandhe muñcitvā upādānaṃ natthi. Chandarāgavemattatāti chandarāganānattaṃ. Evaṃ kho bhikkhūti evaṃ rūpārammaṇassa chandarāgassa vedanādīsu aññataraṃ ārammaṇaṃ akaraṇato siyā chandarāgavemattatā. Khandhādhivacananti khandhāti ayaṃ paññatti. Ayaṃ pana anusandhi na ghaṭiyati, kiñcāpi na ghaṭiyati, sānusandhikāva pucchā, sānusandhikaṃ vissajjanaṃ. Ayañhi thero tesaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ajjhāsayena pucchati, satthāpi tesaṃ tesaṃ ajjhāsayeneva vissajjeti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Dasamaṃ.
而在这个品的每一部经里,各有五百位比丘证得了阿罗汉果。巴利
Imassa ca pana vaggassa ekekasmiṃ sutte pañcasatā pañcasatā bhikkhū arahattaṃ pattāti.
1. 《阿难经》的注释巴利
1. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
83 83. 在《长老品》的第一部经里,“满达尼之子”是指一个名叫满达尼的婆罗门女所生的儿子。“基于”就是依靠、缘于、关于、因为。“我是而有”是说,像这样生起的渴爱、慢、见这三种戏论就存在了。“年轻”就是年少。“青年”就是具备青春。“喜好装饰者”就是本性爱装饰、习惯爱装饰。“面容相”就是脸的影像。因为它是依靠清净的镜面才显现出来的。那么,看的时候,显现的是自己的脸,还是别人的脸呢?如果是自己的脸,就应该以背向而显现;如果是别人的脸,就应该以在肤色等方面和自己不同的样子显现。所以,那既不是自己的,也不是别人的,而是依靠镜子显现出来的光影之形,他们这样说。那么,水中显现的影像,又是什么原因呢?是因为四大种清净的缘故。“我已现证法”是说,我以智慧现观了四圣谛法,已经成为入流者。他这样说了。第一部分。巴利
83. Theravaggassa paṭhame mantāṇiputtoti, mantāṇiyā nāma brāhmaṇiyā putto. Upādāyāti āgamma ārabbha sandhāya paṭicca. Asmīti hotīti asmīti evaṃ pavattaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcattayaṃ hoti. Daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbanena samannāgato. Maṇḍanakajātikoti maṇḍanakasabhāvo maṇḍanakasīlo. Mukhanimittanti mukhapaṭibimbaṃ. Tañhi parisuddhaṃ ādāsamaṇḍalaṃ paṭicca paññāyati. Kiṃ pana taṃ olokayato sakamukhaṃ paññāyati, paramukhanti? Yadi sakaṃ bhaveyya, parammukhaṃ hutvā paññāyeyya, atha parassa bhaveyya, vaṇṇādīhi asadisaṃ hutvā paññāyeyya. Tasmā na taṃ attano, na parassa, ādāsaṃ pana nissāya nibhāsarūpaṃ nāma taṃ paññāyatīti vadanti. Atha yaṃ udake paññāyati, taṃ kena kāraṇenāti ? Mahābhūtānaṃ visuddhatāya. Dhammo me abhisamitoti mayā ñāṇena catusaccadhammo abhisamāgato, sotāpannosmi jātoti kathesi. Paṭhamaṃ.
第二部《帝萨经》的注释巴利
2. Tissasuttavaṇṇanā
84 在第二部经中,“像变成了甜味一样”意思是:好像生起了沉重感,变得不灵活了。他说“连方向我也……”——这是东方,这是南方——像这样,连方向对我来说也不显现、不清楚。他说“连法也不在我心中现起”:连所学的教典之法也不在我心中现起,已受持、已诵习的内容都看不见了。“疑”:这不是指大的疑惑。因为他不会生起“这教法到底能不能导向解脱,还是不能”这样的犹豫。不过他会这样想:“我到底能不能修沙门法,还是只做些拿钵和穿袈裟的事就算了?”巴利
84. Dutiye madhurakajāto viyāti sañjātagarubhāvo viya akammañño. Disāpi meti ayaṃ puratthimā ayaṃ dakkhiṇāti evaṃ disāpi mayhaṃ na pakkhāyanti, na pākaṭā hontīti vadati. Dhammāpi maṃ na paṭibhantīti pariyattidhammāpi mayhaṃ na upaṭṭhahanti, uggahitaṃ sajjhāyitaṃ na dissatīti vadati. Vicikicchāti no mahāvicikicchā. Na hi tassa ‘‘sāsanaṃ niyyānikaṃ nu kho, na nu kho’’ti vimati uppajjati. Evaṃ panassa hoti ‘‘sakkhissāmi nu kho samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ, udāhu pattacīvaradhāraṇamattameva karissāmī’’ti.
“这是对诸欲的另一种说法。”意思是:好比有人俯视一片低洼的沼泽,看到的只是赏心悦目的景象而已;但谁要是走进去,就会被里面凶猛的鳄鱼拖住,遭遇灾祸与毁灭。同样,在五种欲乐特质中,眼门等所缘也只是看起来有些悦意而已;但谁要是对它生起贪著,就会被拖住,直接被扔进地狱等处。欲乐确实乐味少、苦多、忧恼多,其中的过患更为重大。正是基于这个道理,才说“这是对诸欲的另一种说法”。“我以摄益”:我以法和物质的利益来帮助他。“欢喜”:他接受了。他不仅欢喜,而且在从导师那里得到安慰后,精勤努力,几天之内就证得了阿罗汉果。第二。巴利
Kāmānametaṃ adhivacananti yathā hi ninnaṃ pallalaṃ olokentassa dassanarāmaṇeyyakamattaṃ atthi, yo panettha otarati, taṃ caṇḍamīnākulatāya ākaḍḍhitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpeti, evamevaṃ pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cakkhudvārādīnaṃ ārammaṇe rāmaṇeyyakamattaṃ atthi, yo panettha gedhaṃ āpajjati, taṃ ākaḍḍhitvā nirayādīsu eva pakkhipanti. Appassādā hi kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyoti imaṃ atthavasaṃ paṭicca ‘‘kāmānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Ahamanuggahenāti ahaṃ dhammāmisānuggahehi anuggaṇhāmi. Abhinandīti sampaṭicchi. Na kevalañca abhinandi, imaṃ pana satthu santikā assāsaṃ labhitvā ghaṭento vāyamanto katipāhena arahatte patiṭṭhāsi. Dutiyaṃ.
第三 焰摩迦经的注释巴利
3. Yamakasuttavaṇṇanā
85 在第三恶见中,所谓“恶见”:如果他真的这样认为——“诸行生起又灭去,诸行的持续运转本身就是不运转”——那就不会成为恶见,而会是属于教法范围内的智慧。然而,因为他生起了“有情被断灭、被毁灭”的想法,所以就成了恶见。“以强力执取”:是指以邪见的强力与邪见的执取。巴利
85. Tatiye diṭṭhigatanti sace hissa evaṃ bhaveyya ‘‘saṅkhārā uppajjanti ceva nirujjhanti ca, saṅkhārappavattameva appavattaṃ hotī’’ti, diṭṭhigataṃ nāma na bhaveyya, sāsanāvacarikaṃ ñāṇaṃ bhaveyya. Yasmā panassa ‘‘satto ucchijjati vinassatī’’ti ahosi, tasmā diṭṭhigataṃ nāma jātaṃ. Thāmasā parāmāsāti diṭṭhithāmena ceva diṭṭhiparāmāsena ca.
“前往具寿舍利弗那里”:就像边境发生叛乱时,国王的臣属们无法平息叛乱,就会去将军或国王那里;同样,由于执著于恶见,那位长老愤怒了,那些比丘无法平息他的愤怒,便前往法王的法将军——具寿舍利弗所在之处。“如此记说”:他无法像在那些比丘面前那样,在长老面前坦然说出,于是怀着沉重的心情说“如此记说”。“贤友,你对此怎么想?”长老听了他的话后,心想:“这个人看不到自己见解中的过失,我要通过说法使那过失显现出来。”于是开始宣说三转的开示。巴利
Yenāyasmāsāriputtoti yathā nāma paccante kupite taṃ vūpasametuṃ asakkontā rājapurisā senāpatissa vā rañño vā santikaṃ gacchanti, evaṃ diṭṭhigatavasena tasmiṃ there kupite taṃ vūpasametuṃ asakkontā te bhikkhū yena dhammarājassa dhammasenāpati āyasmā sāriputto , tenupasaṅkamiṃsu. Evaṃbyākhoti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santike viya therassa sammukhā paggayha vattuṃ asakkonto olambantena hadayena ‘‘evaṃbyākho’’ti āha. Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, āvusoti? Idaṃ thero tassa vacanaṃ sutvā, ‘‘nāyaṃ attano laddhiyaṃ dosaṃ passati, dhammadesanāya assa taṃ pākaṭaṃ karissāmī’’ti cintetvā tiparivaṭṭaṃ desanaṃ desetuṃ ārabhi.
贤友阎摩迦,你怎么看?为什么一开始就问“色是如来吗”?这是为了让他掌握问答的规范。因为在三转说法结束时,这位长老已经证得入流果。那时为了让他掌握问答的规范,才说了“你怎么看”等话。“如来”指的就是众生。他问的是:你是否把色、受、想、行、识这五蕴合在一起,把它们当作一个“如来”来看待?这里说“在此,贤友”,这是长老在追问时的一种表达。这话的意思是:就在这些地方,在当下可见的法中,根本找不到一个真实、坚固的众生。如果说“贤友,如果你……”,这是想让他换一种方式回答而发问。“凡是苦,那即已灭”:凡是苦,它本身就已经灭了,并没有另一个叫“灭尽者”的众生存在,他应当这样回答。巴利
Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, āvuso yamaka, rūpaṃ tathāgatoti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Anuyogavattaṃ dāpanatthaṃ. Tiparivaṭṭadesanāvasānasmiñhi thero sotāpanno jāto. Atha naṃ anuyogavattaṃ dāpetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasī’’tiādimāha? Tathāgatoti satto. Rūpaṃ vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇanti ime pañcakkhandhe sampiṇḍetvā ‘‘tathāgato’’ti samanupassasīti pucchati. Ettha ca te, āvusoti idaṃ therassa anuyoge bhummaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ettha ca te ettake ṭhāne diṭṭheva dhamme saccato thirato satte anupalabbhiyamāneti. Sace taṃ, āvusoti idametaṃ aññaṃ byākarāpetukāmo pucchati. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ taṃ niruddhanti yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadeva niruddhaṃ, añño satto nirujjhanako nāma natthi, evaṃ byākareyyanti attho.
“就是为了这个意义”,指的是为了这第一道。“为了更殊胜的智”,是为了更高程度的智,也就是为了显现与观共同生起的以及上面三道,这是这句话的意思。“具足守护”,是指具备内在的守护和外在的守护。“不想得到轭的安稳”,是指不想要从四种轭中解脱出来的安稳。“克服”,就是压制、战胜。“潜入”,就是进入。巴利
Etasseva atthassāti etassa paṭhamamaggassa. Bhiyyosomattāya ñāṇāyāti atirekappamāṇassa ñāṇassa atthāya, sahavipassanakānaṃ upari ca tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ āvibhāvatthāyāti attho. Ārakkhasampannoti antoārakkhena ceva bahiārakkhena ca samannāgato. Ayogakkhemakāmoti catūhi yogehi khemabhāvaṃ anicchanto. Pasayhāti pasayhitvā abhibhavitvā. Anupakhajjāti anupavisitvā.
有人从远处走来时,他就先从座位上起身,这叫先起者。把座位让给对方,等对方坐下后自己才坐下,这叫后坐者。清晨最早起来,安排说“你们这些人去耕这么多地,你们这些人去播这么多种”,这叫先起者。傍晚大家都回到各自住处后,他布置好住宅四周的守护,关好门,最后才躺下,因此也叫后卧者。总是看着对方的脸问“要我做什么,少主人?要我做什么,少主人们?”并回应对方的需要,这叫随应者。做让人喜欢的事,这叫悦意行者。说让人爱听的话,这叫爱语者。从朋友的角度也会信任他,心想“这是我的朋友”,因此会信任他。会生起信赖:一起分享饮食等,成为可信赖的人。十分信赖,就是完全信任。巴利
Pubbuṭṭhāyītiādīsu dūratova āgacchantaṃ disvā āsanato paṭhamataraṃ vuṭṭhātīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Tassa āsanaṃ datvā tasmiṃ nisinne pacchā nipatati nisīdatīti, pacchānipātī. Pātova vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ettakā kasituṃ gacchatha, ettakā vapitu’’nti vā sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuṭṭhātīti pubbuṭṭhāyī. Sāyaṃ sabbesu attano attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gatesu gehassa samantato ārakkhaṃ saṃvidhāya dvārāni thaketvā sabbapacchā nipajjanatopi pacchānipātī. ‘‘Kiṃ karomi , ayyaputta ? Kiṃ karomi ayyaputtā’’ti? Mukhaṃ olokento kiṃkāraṃ paṭisāvetīti kiṃkārapaṭissāvī. Manāpaṃ caratīti manāpacārī. Piyaṃ vadatīti piyavādī. Mittatopi naṃ saddaheyyāti mitto me ayanti saddaheyya. Vissāsaṃ āpajjeyyāti ekato pānabhojanādiṃ karonto vissāsiko bhaveyya. Saṃvissatthoti suṭṭhu vissattho.
同样地,“正是如此”在这里是譬喻的对应:愚痴的居士子就像还在轮回中的无闻凡夫;杀手怨敌就像软弱无力的五蕴;杀手怨敌假装“我要来侍奉愚痴居士子”而接近的时刻,就像结生刹那现起的五蕴;他不知道“这人不是我的朋友,而是杀手怨敌”的时候,就像还在轮回中的凡夫不把五蕴看作“这些不是我的”,反而执取“这是我的色、我的受、我的想、我的行、我的识”;把杀手怨敌当成“我的朋友”而恭敬款待的时候,就像执取“这些是我的”之后,对五蕴用沐浴、喂食等方式恭敬对待;因为“我太信任他了”而正在恭敬款待时被刀砍断头,就像信任五蕴的愚痴凡夫,在锐利、不断坏灭的诸蕴中耗尽生命。应当这样理解。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – bālagahapatiputto viya hi vaṭṭasannissitakāle assutavā puthujjano , vadhakapaccāmitto viya abaladubbalā pañcakkhandhā, vadhakapaccāmittassa ‘‘bālagahapatiputtaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti upagatakālo viya paṭisandhikkhaṇe upagatā pañcakkhandhā, tassa hi ‘‘na me ayaṃ sahāyo, vadhakapaccatthiko aya’’nti ajānanakālo viya vaṭṭanissitaputhujjanassa pañcakkhandhe ‘‘na ime mayha’’nti agahetvā ‘‘mama rūpaṃ, mama vedanā, mama saññā, mama saṅkhārā, mama viññāṇa’’nti gahitakālo, vadhakapaccatthikassa ‘‘mitto me aya’’nti gahetvā sakkārakaraṇakālo viya ‘‘mama ime’’ti gahetvā pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nhāpanabhojanādīhi sakkārakaraṇakālo, ‘‘ativissattho me aya’’nti ñatvā sakkāraṃ karontasseva asinā sīsacchindanaṃ viya vissatthassa bālaputhujjanassa tikhiṇehi bhijjamānehi khandhehi jīvitapariyādānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“靠近”就是走向、接近。“执取”就是抓住、握持。“确立”就是坚定地安住。“这是我的我”就是“这是我的自我”。可是,贤友,多闻的圣弟子就像一位有智慧的居士子,知道“这是我的敌人”后,不放逸,去做各种该做的事,避开不利,获得利益;同样,多闻的圣弟子以“不把色看作我”等方式,不把五蕴执取为我或我所有,知道“这些是我的敌人”,再通过色七法、无色七法等修观,由此避免因五蕴而生的苦,证得最高的果——阿罗汉果。这里其余的内容都很容易理解。第三。巴利
Upetīti upagacchati. Upādiyatīti gaṇhāti. Adhiṭṭhātīti adhitiṭṭhati. Attā meti ayaṃ me attāti. Sutavā ca kho, āvuso, ariyasāvakoti yathā pana paṇḍito gahapatiputto evaṃ upagataṃ paccatthikaṃ ‘‘paccatthiko me aya’’nti ñatvā appamatto tāni tāni kammāni kāretvā anatthaṃ pariharati, atthaṃ pāpuṇāti, evaṃ sutavā ariyasāvakopi ‘‘na rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā nayena pañcakkhandhe ahanti vā mamanti vā agahetvā, ‘‘paccatthikā me ete’’ti ñatvā rūpasattakaarūpasattakādivasena vipassanāya yojetvāva tatonidānaṃ dukkhaṃ parivajjetvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tatiyaṃ.
第四 阿奴罗陀经的注释巴利
4. Anurādhasuttavaṇṇanā
86 86. 第四处中,“于林中小屋”:就是在那座寺院边上的一间树叶搭的棚屋。“彼为如来”:你们的导师如来,那个有情就是如来。“除却这些”:据说他当时这样想:“这些人是教法的对立者和逆反者,照他们这样说,导师不会这样解说,会以另一种方式解说。”所以才这样说。这样说之后,那些外道游方者——尊者还不了解自己和别人的主张就说了这番话,而那些外道游方者已经部分了解佛教的主张,想挑剔尊者言论的毛病,便对具寿阿奴罗陀说了这样的话。巴利
86. Catutthe araññakuṭikāyanti tasseva vihārassa paccante paṇṇasālāyaṃ. Taṃ tathāgatoti tumhākaṃ satthā tathāgato taṃ sattaṃ tathāgataṃ. Aññatra imehīti tassa kira evaṃ ahosi ‘‘ime sāsanassa paṭipakkhā paṭivilomā, yathā ime bhaṇanti, na evaṃ satthā paññāpessati, aññathā paññāpessatī’’ti. Tasmā evamāha. Evaṃ vutte te aññatitthiyāti evaṃ therena attano ca paresañca samayaṃ ajānitvā vutte ekadesena sāsanasamayaṃ jānantā therassa vāde dosaṃ dātukāmā te aññatitthiyā paribbājakā āyasmantaṃ anurādhaṃ etadavocuṃ.
“阿奴罗陀,你怎么看?”导师听了他的话后,心里想:“这位比丘没有察觉到自己见解里的错误,但他是个堪受教法的人,我就通过说法让他明白吧。”于是,为了开示三转的法义,导师说:“阿奴罗陀,你怎么看?”等等。接着,在那次说法中,对已证得阿拉汉境界的他施加追问仪轨,导师又说:“阿奴罗陀,你怎么看?色是如来吗?”等等。“我只阐明苦以及苦的灭尽”:我阐明的就是轮回之苦,以及轮回之苦的灭尽——涅槃。或者说,用“苦”这个词,就涵盖了苦谛;涵盖了苦谛,也就涵盖了集谛,因为集谛是苦的根源。用“灭”这个词,就涵盖了灭谛;涵盖了灭谛,也就涵盖了道谛,因为道谛是证入灭谛的方法。这样就表明:阿奴罗陀,我从过去到现在,始终只阐明这四圣谛。如此,在这部经中,说的只是流转与还灭。第四。巴利
Taṃ kiṃ maññasi anurādhāti satthā tassa kathaṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu attano laddhiyaṃ dosaṃ na jānāti, kārako panesa yuttayogo, dhammadesanāya eva naṃ jānāpessāmī’’ti tiparivaṭṭaṃ desanaṃ desetukāmo ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi, anurādhā’’tiādimāha. Athassa tāya desanāya arahattappattassa anuyogavattaṃ āropento taṃ kiṃ maññasi, anurādha? Rūpaṃ tathāgatotiādimāha. Dukkhañceva paññapemi, dukkhassa ca nirodhanti vaṭṭadukkhañceva vaṭṭadukkhassa ca nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ paññapemi. Dukkhanti vā vacanena dukkhasaccaṃ gahitaṃ. Tasmiṃ gahite samudayasaccaṃ gahitameva hoti, tassa mūlattā. Nirodhanti vacanena nirodhasaccaṃ gahitaṃ. Tasmiṃ gahite maggasaccaṃ gahitameva hoti tassa upāyattā. Iti pubbe cāhaṃ, anurādha, etarahi ca catusaccameva paññapemīti dasseti. Evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Catutthaṃ.
第五 婆迦梨经的注释巴利
5. Vakkalisuttavaṇṇanā
87 87. 第五经中,“在陶匠的住所”指的是陶匠的作坊。据说那位长老雨安居结束后,举行自恣,然后前来拜见世尊。他在城中心突发重病,双脚走不动了。于是人们用床轿把他抬到陶匠的作坊。那间作坊是他们干活的地方,不是住人的居所。因此经文才说“住在陶匠的住所”。“重病”指极其严重的病。“俯身”指向四周俯下身体,以颤动的姿态表示敬意。据说有这样的规矩:即使身患重病,见到比自己年长的比丘,也应当做出起身的姿态来表示敬意。但旁人应该对他说:“别动,别动。”“有这些座位”:在佛陀住世的时候,哪怕只有一位比丘住的地方,也会准备好座位,心想“如果导师来了,可以坐在这里”,哪怕只是一块木板,或者只铺了一层草垫。“是否还能忍耐、还能维持”:这是在问“你能忍受病痛吗?还能维持日常的威仪吗?”“退减”指退失。“增进”指进展。“退减者”指这些的退失。“不以戒指责”:指在戒律方面,不因戒行而受到指责。“久病者”:我是个久病的人,意思是长久以来一直如此。“以腐烂之身”:世尊自己的身体本来如黄金般光泽,但这里从不断流漏的角度这样说。“婆迦梨,凡是法”:这里世尊显示的是法身,正如经中所说“大王,如来即是法身”。因为如来的身体,就是九种出世间法。巴利
87. Pañcame kumbhakāranivesaneti kumbhakārasālāyaṃ. Thero kira vutthavasso pavāretvā bhagavantaṃ dassanāya āgacchati. Tassa nagaramajjhe mahāābādho uppajji, pādā na vahanti. Atha naṃ mañcakasivikāya kumbhakārasālaṃ āhariṃsu. Sā ca sālā tesaṃ kammasālā, na nivesanasālā. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘kumbhakāranivesane viharatī’’ti. Bāḷhagilānoti adhimattagilāno. Samadhosīti samantato adhosi, calanākārena apacitiṃ dassesi. Vattaṃ kiretaṃ bāḷhagilānenapi buḍḍhataraṃ disvā uṭṭhānākārena apaciti dassetabbā. Tena pana ‘‘mā cali mā calī’’ti vattabbo. Santimāni āsanānīti buddhakālasmiñhi ekassapi bhikkhuno vasanaṭṭhāne ‘‘sace satthā āgacchissati, idha nisīdissatī’’ti āsanaṃ paññattameva hoti antamaso phalakamattampi paṇṇasanthāramattampi. Khamanīyaṃ yāpanīyanti kacci dukkhaṃ khamituṃ iriyāpathaṃ vā yāpetuṃ sakkāti pucchati. Paṭikkamantīti nivattanti. Abhikkamantīti adhigacchanti . Paṭikkamosānanti paṭikkamo etāsaṃ. Sīlato na upavadatīti sīlaṃ ārabbha sīlabhāvena na upavadati. Cirapaṭikāhanti cirapaṭiko ahaṃ, cirato paṭṭhāya ahanti attho. Pūtikāyenāti attano suvaṇṇavaṇṇampi kāyaṃ bhagavā dhuvapaggharaṇaṭṭhena evamāha. Yo kho, vakkali, dhammanti idha bhagavā ‘‘dhammakāyo kho, mahārāja, tathāgato’’ti vuttaṃ dhammakāyataṃ dasseti. Navavidho hi lokuttaradhammo tathāgatassa kāyo nāma.
这时,为了给这位长老开示三转的法义,世尊说了“你意下如何”等话。“黑石”就是黑石寺。“为了解脱”是为了以道而得的解脱。“已善解脱者将解脱”是指已经以阿罗汉果的解脱而解脱,之后还将(进一步)解脱。据说那些天神知道:“以这样的方式,他发起了观,将会毫无障碍地证得阿罗汉果。”所以才这样说。“无罪的”就是没有过失的。“他拿起了刀”:据说这位长老生起了增上慢。他看不到被定和观暂时压伏的烦恼还会现起,就以为自己“我是漏尽者”,心想:“我何必过这种痛苦的生活?拿刀来死了吧。”于是用锋利的刀割断了自己的喉咙。这时,苦受生起了。他在那一刻知道自己还是凡夫,但由于没有舍弃根本业处,便迅速取来根本业处观照,证得阿罗汉果之后才死去。那么他的省察又是怎样的呢?漏尽者有十九种省察,但并非全都要必然生起。不过,当锋利的刀砍在头上时,必定会生起一种或两种智。巴利
Idāni therassa tiparivaṭṭadhammadesanaṃ ārabhanto taṃ kiṃ maññasītiādimāha. Kāḷasilāti kāḷasilāvihāro. Vimokkhāyāti maggavimokkhatthāya. Suvimutto vimuccissatīti arahattaphalavimuttiyā vimutto hutvā vimuccissati. Tā kira devatā ‘‘yena nīhārena iminā vipassanā āraddhā, anantarāyena arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti ñatvā evamāhaṃsu. Apāpakanti alāmakaṃ. Satthaṃ āharesīti thero kira adhimāniko ahosi. So samādhivipassanāhi vikkhambhitānaṃ kilesānaṃ samudācāraṃ apassanto ‘‘khīṇāsavomhī’’ti saññī hutvā ‘‘kiṃ me iminā dukkhena jīvitena? Satthaṃ āharitvā marissāmī’’ti tikhiṇena satthena kaṇṭhanāḷaṃ chindi. Athassa dukkhā vedanā uppajji. So tasmiṃ khaṇe attano puthujjanabhāvaṃ ñatvā avissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānattā sīghaṃ mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ ādāya sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇitvāva kālamakāsi. Paccavekkhaṇā panassa ca kathaṃ ahosīti? Khīṇāsavassa ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇā na sabbāva avassaṃ laddhabbā, tikhiṇenāpi pana asinā sīse chijjante ekaṃ dve ñāṇāni avassaṃ uppajjanti.
身体翻转:就是身体翻过去。躺着:就是躺着。据说这位长老仰面躺着,拿起了刀。他的身体还是保持原来的姿势,但头却转向了右侧。因为圣弟子们大多数都是向右侧卧而命终的。所以他的身体保持原样,只有头转向右侧停在那里。就是针对这一点,也有人说这被称为“身转”。如烟:就是像冒烟的状态。如暗:就是像昏暗的状态。意思是说,像冒烟的云,像昏暗的云。第五。巴利
Vivattakkhandhanti parivattakkhandhaṃ. Semānanti sayamānaṃ. Thero kira uttānako nipanno satthaṃ āhari. Tassa sarīraṃ yathāṭhitameva ahosi. Sīsaṃ pana dakkhiṇapassena parivattitvā aṭṭhāsi. Ariyasāvakā hi yebhuyyena dakkhiṇapasseneva kālaṃ karonti. Tenassa sarīraṃ yathāṭhitaṃyeva ahosi. Sīsaṃ pana dakkhiṇapassena parivattitvā ṭhitaṃ. Taṃ sandhāya vivattakkhandho nāma jātotipi vadanti. Dhūmāyitattanti dhūmāyanabhāvaṃ . Timirāyitattanti timirāyanabhāvaṃ. Dhūmavalāhakaṃ viya timiravalāhakaṃ viya cāti attho. Pañcamaṃ.
第6篇 阿说示经的注释巴利
6. Assajisuttavaṇṇanā
88 88. 第六经。在迦叶园:就是长者迦叶所建的寺院里。身行:指入出息。他确实以第四禅那一次又一次地平息它,然后安住。他这样想:现在他没能证得那种定,就生起这样的念头:我该不会从教法上退堕吧?据说,他因为疾病的障碍,原本已经进入的等至退失了,所以才这样想。以定为心髓、以定为沙门法:他们认为只有定才是心髓和沙门法。可是在我的教法里,这不是心髓,观、道、果才是心髓。你只是从定上退堕,为什么却想我从教法上退堕了呢?这样安慰那位长老之后,就为他开始三轮转的说法,开头说:你认为如何?在三轮转开示结束时,为了显示他证得阿拉汉果后的日常安住,说道:当他感受乐受时……。其中,不欢喜,他清楚了知:对乐受的欢喜先不说,对苦受怎么会欢喜呢?遇到苦时就会希求乐,而从希求乐的那一刻起,他其实就是在希求苦。因为乐一变坏,苦就已经跟着来了。所以应当知道,这就是对苦的欢喜。其余部分和前面所说的一样。第六经。巴利
88. Chaṭṭhe kassapakārāmeti kassapaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme. Kāyasaṅkhāreti assāsapassāse . So hi te catutthajjhānena passambhitvā passambhitvā vihāsi. Evaṃ hotīti idāni taṃ samādhiṃ appaṭilabhantassa evaṃ hoti. No cassāhaṃ parihāyāmīti kacci nu kho ahaṃ sāsanato na parihāyāmi? Tassa kira ābādhadosena appitappitā samāpatti parihāyi, tasmā evaṃ cintesi. Samādhisārakā samādhisāmaññāti samādhiṃyeva sārañca sāmaññañca maññanti. Mayhaṃ pana sāsane na etaṃ sāraṃ, vipassanāmaggaphalāni sāraṃ. So tvaṃ samādhito parihāyanto kasmā cintesi ‘‘sāsanato parihāyāmī’’ti. Evaṃ theraṃ assāsetvā idānissa tiparivaṭṭaṃ dhammadesanaṃ ārabhanto taṃ kiṃ maññasītiādimāha. Athassa tiparivaṭṭadesanāvasāne arahattaṃ pattassa satatavihāraṃ dassento so sukhaṃ ce vedanaṃ vedayatītiādimāha . Tattha anabhinanditāti pajānātīti sukhavedanāya tāva abhinandanā hotu, dukkhavedanāya kathaṃ hotīti? Dukkhaṃ patvā sukhaṃ pattheti, yadaggena sukhaṃ pattheti, tadaggena dukkhaṃ patthetiyeva. Sukhavipariṇāmena hi dukkhaṃ āgatameva hotīti evaṃ dukkhe abhinandanā veditabbā. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayamevāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
7. 堪玛咖经的注释巴利
7. Khemakasuttavaṇṇanā
89 89. 在第七经中,“自己的”指属于自己的资具之类。“已证得‘我是’”指这样生起的渴爱与慢已经被证得。“流转”指一再地来来去去。“接近了”指他从枣林园走了大约一俱卢舍的路,到了瞿师罗园。而达萨卡长老当天来回走了四趟,一共走了两由旬的路。那些长老为什么派他去呢?因为他们想从那位著名的说法者那里听闻佛法。那他们自己为什么不去呢?因为长老住的地方在森林里,空间狭小,没有能容纳大约六十位长老站立或坐下的地方,所以没去。那为什么不派人去说“请尊者来这里为我们说法”呢?因为长老正生病。那又为什么一再派人去呢?他们想:“尊者自己知道我们的心意后,会来为我们说法的。”而长老也正是知道了他们的心意才去的。巴利
89. Sattame attaniyanti attano parikkhārajātaṃ. Asmīti adhigatanti asmīti evaṃ pavattā taṇhāmānā adhigatā. Sandhāvanikāyāti punappunaṃ gamanāgamanena. Upasaṅkamīti badarikārāmato gāvutamattaṃ ghositārāmaṃ agamāsi. Dāsakatthero pana catukkhattuṃ gamanāgamanena taṃdivasaṃ dviyojanaṃ addhānaṃ āhiṇḍi. Kasmā pana taṃ therā pahiṇiṃsu? Vissutassa dhammakathikassa santikā dhammaṃ suṇissāmāti. Sayaṃ kasmā na gatāti? Therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ araññaṃ sambādhaṃ, tattha saṭṭhimattānaṃ therānaṃ ṭhātuṃ vā nisīdituṃ vā okāso natthīti na gatā. ‘‘Idhāgantvā amhākaṃ dhammaṃ kathetū’’tipi kasmā pana na pahiṇiṃsūti? Therassa ābādhikattā. Atha kasmā punappunaṃ pahiṇiṃsūti? Sayameva ñatvā amhākaṃ kathetuṃ āgamissatīti. Theropi tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ ñatvāva agamāsīti.
贤友,我并不是说“我是色”。因为,凡是说“我就是色”的人,就等于否定了其他四蕴;凡是说“在色之外有我”的人,就等于否定了色本身。对受等诸蕴,也是同样的道理。但这位长老是在整体上,于五蕴中都证得了“我是”,所以才这样说。“实有”,就是确实存在。“随附的”,就是微细的。“碱”,就是灰碱。“卤”,就是咸卤。“充分揉搓后”,就是浸湿、嚼食之后。巴利
Na khvāhaṃ, āvuso, rūpanti yo hi rūpameva asmīti vadati, tena itare cattāro khandhā paccakkhātā honti. Yo aññatra rūpā vadati, tena rūpaṃ paccakkhātaṃ hoti. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Therassa pana samūhato pañcasupi khandhesu asmīti adhigato, tasmā evamāha. Hotevāti hotiyeva. Anusahagatoti sukhumo. Ūseti chārikākhāre. Khāreti ūsakhāre. Sammadditvāti temetvā khādetvā.
“正是如此”在这里的譬喻对应是:凡夫的心行就像脏衣服;三种随观就像三种碱;不来者的心行就像用三种碱洗过的衣服,经过教法的揉搓而安住;随附的碱味等气味就像阿拉汉道所断的烦恼;香匣就像阿拉汉道的智慧;依靠香匣去除随附的碱味等气味,就像以阿拉汉道灭尽一切烦恼;穿着被香气熏透的衣服,在节日里走上街道、周身散发妙香,就像漏尽者以戒香等功德遍熏十方、随心所欲而行。巴利
Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – kiliṭṭhavatthaṃ viya hi puthujjanassa cittācāro, tayo khārā viya tisso anupassanā, tīhi khārehi dhotavatthaṃ viya desanāya madditvā ṭhito anāgāmino cittācāro, anusahagato ūsādigandho viya arahattamaggavajjhā kilesā, gandhakaraṇḍako viya arahattamaggañāṇaṃ gandhakaraṇḍakaṃ āgamma anusahagatānaṃ ūsagandhādīnaṃ samugghāto viya arahattamaggena sabbakilesakkhayo, gandhaparibhāvitavatthaṃ nivāsetvā chaṇadivase antaravīthiyaṃ sugandhagandhino vicaraṇaṃ viya khīṇāsavassa sīlagandhādīhi dasa disā upavāyantassa yathākāmacāro.
“宣说”就是讲出来。“开示”就是说明清楚。“令知”就是让人知道。“建立”就是让它站稳。“开显”就是使它显露出来。“分别”就是把它细细分析清楚。“令浅显”就是让它变得容易明白。所谓“约六十位长老”,据说那些长老在长老讲过的每一个地方都建立起观慧,然后一层一层往上观照,在开示结束的时候都证得了阿罗汉果。长老本人也不是用别的方式来讲,而是纯粹以和观慧相应的心来讲,所以他也证得了阿罗汉果。因此才说:“约六十位长老比丘和具寿堪玛咖的心,都无所执取,从诸漏中解脱。”第七。巴利
Ācikkhitunti kathetuṃ. Desetunti pakāsetuṃ. Paññāpetunti jānāpetuṃ. Paṭṭhapetunti patiṭṭhāpetuṃ. Vivaritunti vivaṭaṃ kātuṃ. Vibhajitunti suvibhattaṃ kātuṃ. Uttānīkātunti uttānakaṃ kātuṃ. Saṭṭhimattānaṃ therānanti te kira therena kathitakathitaṭṭhāne vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā uparūpari sammasantā desanāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Theropi aññena nīhārena akathetvā vipassanāsahagatacitteneva kathesi. Tasmā sopi arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saṭṭhimattānaṃ therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsu āyasmato khemakassa cā’’ti. Sattamaṃ.
第8章 阐那经的注释巴利
8. Channasuttavaṇṇanā
90 第九十经中,尊者阐那与如来同一天出生,又在如来大出离的那天一起出家离俗。后来他在导师面前出家,却生起“我们的佛、我们的法”这样的心态,变得傲慢又嫉妒,常用粗恶的话去冲撞同梵行者,这就是那位长老。所谓“拿着钥匙”,就是取了钥匙。“从一座精舍到另一座精舍”,是指他进了一座精舍,又从那去另一座,再从那里去下一座,就这样一座一座精舍地走访。他为什么这样大费周章地到处跑,说出“请教导我”这句话呢?是因为心里生起了悚惧。原来,导师般涅槃后,结集法藏的长老们派尊者阿难去憍赏弥,对他施了梵罚。他受到梵罚后,内心焦灼如焚,失去知觉倒在地上。恢复知觉后爬起来,去找一位比丘,那位比丘不跟他说任何话;又去找另一位,另一位也不说。就这样走遍整座精舍,他心生厌离,拿着钵和衣去了波罗奈。因为生起了悚惧,他到处去找比丘,说出了那番话。巴利
90. Aṭṭhame āyasmā channoti tathāgatena saddhiṃ ekadivase jāto mahābhinikkhamanadivase saddhiṃ nikkhamitvā puna aparabhāge satthu santike pabbajitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ buddho amhākaṃ dhammo’’ti evaṃ makkhī ceva paḷāsī ca hutvā sabrahmacārīnaṃ pharusavācāya saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karonto thero. Avāpuraṇaṃ ādāyāti kuñcikaṃ gahetvā. Vihārena vihāraṃ upasaṅkamitvāti ekaṃ vihāraṃ pavisitvā tato aññaṃ, tato aññanti evaṃ tena tena vihārena taṃ taṃ vihāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā. Etadavoca ovadantu manti kasmā evaṃ mahantena ussāhena tattha tattha gantvā etaṃ avocāti? Uppannasaṃvegatāya. Tassa hi parinibbute satthari dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi pesito āyasmā ānando kosambiṃ gantvā brahmadaṇḍaṃ adāsi. So dinne brahmadaṇḍe sañjātapariḷāho visaññībhūto patitvā puna saññaṃ labhitvā vuṭṭhāya ekassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gato, so tena saddhiṃ kiñci na kathesi. Aññassa santikaṃ agamāsi, sopi na kathesīti evaṃ sakalavihāraṃ vicaritvā nibbinno pattacīvaraṃ ādāya bārāṇasiṃ gantvā uppannasaṃvego tattha tattha gantvā evaṃ avoca.
一切行都是无常的,就是说三界内的一切行都是无常的。一切法都是无我的,就是说四地的一切法都是无我的。那些比丘在教导这位长老时,只讲了无常相和无我相这两个相,没有讲苦相。为什么?据说他们当时是这样想的:这位比丘善于辩论,如果讲苦相——说色是苦……乃至识是苦、道是苦、果是苦——他可能会抓住这一点,认为你们这些比丘就是所谓得苦的人。为了不让他抓住这种把柄,我们要让他挑不出毛病地来说法。于是他们只讲了这两个相。巴利
Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti sabbe tebhūmakasaṅkhārā aniccā. Sabbe dhammā anattāti sabbe catubhūmakadhammā anattā. Iti sabbepi te bhikkhū theraṃ ovadantā aniccalakkhaṇaṃ anattalakkhaṇanti dveva lakkhaṇāni kathetvā dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ na kathayiṃsu. Kasmā? Evaṃ kira nesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu vādī dukkhalakkhaṇe paññāpiyamāne rūpaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ dukkhaṃ, maggo dukkho, phalaṃ dukkhanti ‘tumhe dukkhappattā bhikkhū nāmā’ti gahaṇaṃ gaṇheyya, yathā gahaṇaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ niddosamevassa katvā kathessāmā’’ti dveva lakkhaṇāni kathayiṃsu.
“发颤和执取生起”,意思是发颤和执取都生起来了。心又退转回去,于是想:“那么,到底什么才是我呢?”如果在色等诸法里连一个我都没有,那到底什么才是我呢?他就这样退回来,说“我的心”。据说这位长老没有先把握住缘,就直接修观,他的观力太弱,无法断除我执。当诸行以空的方式显现时,便成了“我会断灭,我会消失”这种断见和发颤的助缘。他看见自己好像正往深渊里坠落一样,就说:“发颤和执取生起,心又退转回去,那么,到底什么才是我呢?”然而,对于见法的人来说,并不是这样;对于见四圣谛法的人来说,并不会这样。所谓“只有那么一点点的信赖”,就是只有那么一点点的信任。长老听了他的话之后,心想:“对于这个人来说,什么样的说法才合适呢?”于是思惟、检阅三藏佛语,看到了《迦旃延经》(相应部尼柯耶2.15),便说:“这部经从一开始就破除见执,中间显示佛力,阐明微细的缘行相,我应当为他说这个。”于是开示说“当面见我”等语。第八。巴利
Paritassanā upādānaṃ uppajjatīti paritassanā ca upādānañca uppajjati. Paccudāvattati mānasaṃ, atha ko carahi me attāti yadi rūpādīsu ekopi anattā, atha ko nāma me attāti evaṃ paṭinivattati ‘‘mayhaṃ mānasa’’nti. Ayaṃ kira thero paccaye apariggahetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapesi, sāssa dubbalavipassanā attagāhaṃ pariyādātuṃ asakkuṇantī saṅkhāresu suññato upaṭṭhahantesu ‘‘ucchijjissāmi vinassissāmī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiyā ceva paritassanāya ca paccayo ahosi. So ca attānaṃ pāpate papatantaṃ viya disvā, ‘‘paritassanā upādānaṃ uppajjati, paccudāvattati mānasaṃ, atha ko carahi me attā’’ti āha. Na kho panevaṃ dhammaṃ passato hotīti catusaccadhammaṃ passantassa evaṃ na hoti. Tāvatikā vissaṭṭhīti tattako vissāso. Sammukhā metanti thero tassa vacanaṃ sutvā, ‘‘kīdisā nu kho imassa dhammadesanā sappāyā’’ti? Cintento tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ vicinitvā kaccānasuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.15) addasa ‘‘idaṃ āditova diṭṭhiviniveṭhanaṃ katvā majjhe buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā saṇhasukhumapaccayākāraṃ pakāsayamānaṃ gataṃ, idamassa desessāmī’’ti dassento ‘‘sammukhā meta’’ntiādimāha. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
9-10. 《罗睺罗经》等的注释巴利
9-10. Rāhulasuttādivaṇṇanā
91-92 第九经和第十经的内容,跟《罗睺罗相应》(相应部2.188)里讲的完全一样。只是因为它们属于这个《长老品》,才被收在这里。第九经、第十经。巴利
91-92. Navamadasamāni rāhulasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.188) vuttatthāneva. Kevalaṃ hetāni ayaṃ theravaggoti katvā idhāgatānīti. Navamadasamāni.
《河经》的注释巴利
1. Nadīsuttavaṇṇanā
93 93. 在《花品》第一经的注释里,“山中的”指在山里流动的。“能带走的”指把掉进水里的草、叶子、木片等冲到下游。“远行的”指从流出的地方开始,能走四五百由旬远。“急流的”指湍急迅猛的水流。“迦舍草等”指所有草类。“树”指蓖麻之类的脆弱树木。“那些树会悬垂在它上面”意思是,长在岸边的树即使还立着,也会弯下枝梢碰到水面,悬在水流上方。“会崩坏”指树连根带土一起倒下,砸在人头上。那人被这些倒下的东西盖住,沙土泥水灌进嘴里,就遭到极大的毁灭。巴利
93. Pupphavaggassa paṭhame pabbateyyāti pabbate pavattā. Ohārinīti sote patitapatitāni tiṇapaṇṇakaṭṭhādīni heṭṭhāhārinī. Dūraṅgamāti nikkhantaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya catupañcayojanasatagāminī. Sīghasotāti caṇḍasotā. Kāsātiādīni sabbāni tiṇajātāni. Rukkhāti eraṇḍādayo dubbalarukkhā. Te naṃ ajjholambeyyunti te tīre jātāpi onamitvā aggehi udakaṃ phusantehi adhiolambeyyuṃ, upari lambeyyunti attho. Palujjeyyunti samūlamattikāya saddhiṃ sīse pateyyuṃ. So tehi ajjhotthaṭo vālukamattikodakehi mukhaṃ pavisantehi mahāvināsaṃ pāpuṇeyya.
同样地,在这里应当把落入水流中的人,看作依附轮回的愚痴凡夫;把两岸的迦舍草等,看作脆弱的五蕴。那人不知道“即使抓住这些,也救不了我”就去抓取,正如愚痴凡夫不知道这些五蕴“不是我的依靠”,却以四种执取去执取。由于所抓之物全都毁坏,那人遭遇灾祸;同样,被四种执取所执取的五蕴一旦变易,愚痴凡夫便会遭遇忧愁等灾祸。第一。巴利
Evamevakhoti ettha sote patitapuriso viya vaṭṭasannissito bālaputhujjano daṭṭhabbo, ubhatotīre kāsādayo viya dubbalapañcakkhandhā, ‘‘ime gahitāpi maṃ tāretuṃ na sakkhissantī’’ti tassa purisassa ajānitvā gahaṇaṃ viya ime khandhā ‘‘na mayhaṃ sahāyā’’ti bālaputhujjanassa ajānitvā catūhi gāhehi gahaṇaṃ, gahitagahitānaṃ palujjanattā purisassa byasanappatti viya catūhi gāhehi gahitānaṃ khandhānaṃ vipariṇāme bālaputhujjanassa sokādibyasanappatti veditabbā. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 《花经》的注释巴利
2. Pupphasuttavaṇṇanā
94 94. 第二首偈颂里说“争执”,意思是:如实宣说“无常、苦、无我、不净”的人,和宣说“常、乐、我、净”的人互相争执。“世间法”指五蕴,因为五蕴有坏灭的性质,所以叫世间法。“我做什么呢”意思是“我该怎么做?”这是在说明:我的责任只是讲说修行之道,而把修行圆满则是善男子们自己的责任。这部经里讲了三种世间:“诸比丘,我不与世间争”这一句说的是有情世间;“诸比丘,世间有世间法”这一句说的是行世间;“如来生于世间、长于世间”这一句说的是器世间。第二。巴利
94. Dutiye vivadatīti ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā asubha’’nti yathāsabhāvena vadantena saddhiṃ ‘‘niccaṃ sukhaṃ attā subha’’nti vadanto vivadati. Lokadhammoti khandhapañcakaṃ. Tañhi lujjanasabhāvattā lokadhammoti vuccati. Kinti karomīti kathaṃ karomi? Mayhañhi paṭipattikathanameva bhāro, paṭipattipūraṇaṃ pana kulaputtānaṃ bhāroti dasseti. Imasmiṃ sutte tayo lokā kathitā. ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, lokenā’’ti ettha hi sattaloko kathito, ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, loke lokadhammo’’ti ettha saṅkhāraloko, ‘‘tathāgato loke jāto loke saṃvaḍḍho’’ti ettha okāsaloko kathito. Dutiyaṃ.
第3《泡沫团喻经》的注释巴利
3. Pheṇapiṇḍūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
95 95. 在第三首偈颂中,“在恒河岸边”说的是:阿逾阇城的居民们看见如来由无量比丘众围绕,正在游化,来到了自己的城市,就在恒河一处回水湾边、有大森林覆盖的优美地方,为导师建了精舍并供养。世尊就住在那里。经文就是针对这件事说“在恒河岸边”。“那时,世尊对比丘们说”——住在那个精舍的世尊,傍晚时分从香室出来,坐在恒河岸边铺设好的殊胜佛座上,看见恒河里漂来一个大泡沫团,就想:“我要在我的教法里,讲一个依五蕴而说的法。”然后他对比丘们说了话,那些比丘正围绕着他坐着。巴利
95. Tatiye gaṅgāya nadiyā tīreti ayujjhapuravāsino aparimāṇabhikkhuparivāraṃ cārikaṃ caramānaṃ tathāgataṃ attano nagaraṃ sampattaṃ disvā ekasmiṃ gaṅgāya nivattanaṭṭhāne mahāvanasaṇḍamaṇḍitappadese satthu vihāraṃ katvā adaṃsu. Bhagavā tattha viharati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘gaṅgāya nadiyā tīre’’ti. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti tasmiṃ vihāre vasanto bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṃ gandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā gaṅgātīre paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno gaṅgāya nadiyā āgacchantaṃ mahantaṃ pheṇapiṇḍaṃ disvā, ‘‘mama sāsane pañcakkhandhanissitaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ kathessāmī’’ti cintetvā parivāretvā nisinne bhikkhū āmantesi.
大泡沫团:从最初生起时只有枣核那么大,随着水流一路漂来,逐渐变大,最后变得像山峰一样,里面住着水蛇等许多生物,这样的就叫大泡沫团。会带来:就是取来、带来的意思。而这个泡沫团,有的在刚生起的地方就破了,有的漂了一小段就破了,有的漂了一由旬、两由旬那么远才破,就算中途没破,到了大海里也一定会破。观察:就是仔细看。如理地审察:就是依据道理去探究。诸比丘,泡沫团里能有什么坚实呢?诸比丘,泡沫团里哪有什么叫坚实的东西?它只会消融、坏灭罢了。巴利
Mahantaṃpheṇapiṇḍanti uṭṭhānuṭṭhāne badarapakkappamāṇato paṭṭhāya anusotāgamanena anupubbena pavaḍḍhitvā pabbatakūṭamattaṃ jātaṃ, yattha udakasappādayo anekapāṇayo nivasanti, evarūpaṃ mahantaṃ pheṇapiṇḍaṃ. Āvaheyyāti āhareyya. So panāyaṃ pheṇapiṇḍo uṭṭhitaṭṭhānepi bhijjati , thokaṃ gantvāpi, ekadviyojanādivasena dūraṃ gantvāpi, antarā pana abhijjantopi mahāsamuddaṃ patvā avassameva bhijjati. Nijjhāyeyyāti olokeyya. Yoniso upaparikkheyyāti kāraṇena upaparikkheyya. Kiñhi siyā, bhikkhave, pheṇapiṇḍe sāroti, bhikkhave, pheṇapiṇḍamhi sāro nāma kiṃ bhaveyya? Vilīyitvā viddhaṃseyyeva.
同样地,就像泡沫团没有坚实,色身也一样没有坚实,因为它缺少常的坚实、恒的坚实和我的坚实。又像那个泡沫团,没人能抓住它说“我要用它来做钵或盘子”,就算抓住了也达不到这个目的,它终究会破裂;同样,色身也不能被执取为常、恒、我或我所,就算执取了,它也不会那样保持,它只是无常、苦、无我、不净。这样看来,色身就和泡沫团一样。再者,泡沫团布满孔洞,由许多水泡聚合连结而成,是许多水蛇等生物的住处;同样,色身也布满孔洞,由许多组织连结而成。仅从种类来说,就有八十种虫族住在里面。这个身体就是它们的产房、厕所、病房和坟场,它们不用去别的地方就能生育等等。从这方面看,色身也和泡沫团一样。巴利
Evamevakhoti yathā pheṇapiṇḍo nissāro, evaṃ rūpampi niccasāradhuvasāraattasāravirahena nissārameva. Yathā ca so ‘‘iminā pattaṃ vā thālakaṃ vā karissāmī’’ti gahetuṃ na sakkā, gahitopi tamatthaṃ na sādheti, bhijjati eva, evaṃ rūpampi niccanti vā dhuvanti vā ahanti vā mamanti vā gahetuṃ na sakkā, gahitampi na tathā tiṭṭhati, aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā asubhaññeva hotīti evaṃ pheṇapiṇḍasadisameva hoti. Yathā vā pana pheṇapiṇḍo chiddāvachiddo anekasandhighaṭito bahūnaṃ udakasappādīnaṃ pāṇānaṃ āvāso, evaṃ rūpampi chiddāvachiddaṃ anekasandhighaṭitaṃ, kulavasenevettha asīti kimikulāni vasanti, tadeva tesaṃ sūtigharampi vaccakuṭipi gilānasālāpi susānampi, na te aññattha gantvā gabbhavuṭṭhānādīni karonti, evampi pheṇapiṇḍasadisaṃ.
就像泡沫团最初只有枣核那么大,然后逐渐变大,甚至能变成像山顶那么大;同样,色法最初也只是羯罗蓝那么一点,然后逐渐长大,对牛、水牛、象等来说,能长到像一寻那么长,甚至像山顶那么大;对鱼、龟等来说,能长到几百由旬那么大。从这方面看,色法也像泡沫团。又像泡沫团刚一浮起就破灭,或者稍微漂一会儿就破灭,或者漂远了才破灭,但一旦到达大海,就一定会破灭;同样,色法在羯罗蓝阶段会坏灭,在頞部昙等阶段也会坏灭,虽然在中间阶段不一定坏灭,但对寿命百岁的人来说,到了百岁时必定坏灭,临死时碎成粉末。从这方面看,色法也像泡沫团。巴利
Yathā ca pheṇapiṇḍo ādito badarapakkamatto hutvā anupubbena pabbatakūṭamattopi hoti, evaṃ rūpampi ādito kalalamattaṃ hutvā anupubbena byāmamattampi gomahiṃsahatthiādīnaṃ vasena pabbatakūṭādimattaṃ hoti macchakacchapādīnaṃ vasena anekayojanasatapamāṇampi, evampi pheṇapiṇḍasadisaṃ. Yathā ca pheṇapiṇḍo uṭṭhitamattopi bhijjati, thokaṃ gantvāpi, dūraṃ gantvāpi, samuddaṃ patvā pana avassameva bhijjati, evamevaṃ rūpampi kalalabhāvepi bhijjati abbudādibhāvepi, antarā pana abhijjamānampi vassasatāyukānaṃ vassasataṃ patvā avassameva bhijjati, maraṇamukhe cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ hoti, evampi pheṇapiṇḍasadisaṃ.
比丘们,在“受有什么坚实”等说法中,应当理解受等法与水泡等的相似之处。就像水泡没有坚实,受也是这样。又像水泡没有力量、不可执取,不能拿来做成木板或座位,就算抓住了也会破掉;同样,受也没有力量、不可执取,不能执取为“常”或“恒”,即使执取了也不会那样保持下去。所以,受以不可执取的性质,就像水泡。又像水泡在每一滴水珠上生起又破灭,不能久住;同样,受也是生起又破灭,不能久住。在一弹指那么短的时间里,就有数以万亿计的受生起又灭去。又像水泡依靠水面、水滴、水中污垢,以及收拢成囊而执持之风这四种原因而生起;同样,受也依靠依处、所缘、烦恼垢,以及触的撞击这四种原因而生起。因此,受也像水泡。巴利
Kiñhisiyā, bhikkhave, vedanāya sārotiādīsu vedanādīnaṃ pubbuḷādīhi evaṃ sadisatā veditabbā. Yathā hi pubbuḷo asāro evaṃ vedanāpi. Yathā ca so abalo agayhūpago, na sakkā taṃ gahetvā phalakaṃ vā āsanaṃ vā kātuṃ, gahitopi bhijjateva, evaṃ vedanāpi abalā agayhūpagā, na sakkā niccāti vā dhuvāti vā gahetuṃ, gahitāpi na tathā tiṭṭhati, evaṃ agayhūpagatāyapi vedanā pubbuḷasadisā. Yathā pana tasmiṃ tasmiṃ udakabindumhi pubbuḷo uppajjati ceva bhijjati ca, na ciraṭṭhitiko hoti, evaṃ vedanāpi uppajjati ceva bhijjati ca, na ciraṭṭhitikā hoti. Ekaccharakkhaṇe koṭisatasahassasaṅkhā uppajjitvā nirujjhati. Yathā ca pubbuḷo udakatalaṃ, udakabinduṃ, udakajallaṃ, saṅkaḍḍhitvā puṭaṃ katvā gahaṇavātañcāti cattāri kāraṇāni paṭicca uppajjati, evaṃ vedanāpi vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ kilesajallaṃ phassasaṅghaṭṭanañcāti cattāri kāraṇāni paṭicca uppajjati. Evampi vedanā pubbuḷasadisā.
想也是因为无实义而像阳焰,同样因为不可执取。因为不可能抓住它来喝、来洗澡,或者装满容器。再者,就像阳焰在晃动,看起来像是热流涌动一样,青色想等各类想,为了体验青色等对象而颤动、晃动。又像阳焰欺骗大众,让人说“看起来像满池水、满河水”一样,想也欺骗人,让人说“这是青色、这是美丽、这是快乐、这是常”。对黄色等想,道理也一样。因此,想也因为欺骗性而像阳焰。巴利
Saññāpi asārakaṭṭhena marīcisadisā. Tathā agayhūpagaṭṭhena. Na hi sakkā taṃ gahetvā pivituṃ vā nhāyituṃ vā bhājanaṃ vā pūretuṃ. Apica yathā marīci vipphandati, sañjātūmivegā viya khāyati, evaṃ nīlasaññādibhedā saññāpi nīlādianubhavanatthāya phandati vipphandati. Yathā ca marīci mahājanaṃ vippalambheti ‘‘puṇṇavāpi viya puṇṇanadī viya dissatī’’ti vadāpeti, evaṃ saññāpi vippalambheti, ‘‘idaṃ nīlakaṃ subhaṃ sukhaṃ nicca’’nti vadāpeti. Pītakādīsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ saññā vippalambhanenāpi marīcisadisā.
“没有成熟坚实茎干”是指内部还没有长出坚实的茎干。诸行也因为无实质,所以像芭蕉树干一样;同样,也因为不能被执取。就像从芭蕉树干里无论取出什么,都不可能拿来当椽子等材料用,即使取出来了,也不会像人们以为的那样;同样,诸行也不可能以“常”等观念来执取,即使执取了,它们也不会像那样存在。又像芭蕉树干是由许多层叶鞘聚合而成,行蕴也是这样由许多法聚合而成。又像芭蕉树干有种种不同的特征:外层叶鞘的颜色是一种,里面各层的颜色又是另一种;同样,在行蕴中,触的特征是一种,思等的特征又是另一种,把它们合在一起,就叫做行蕴。因此,行蕴也像芭蕉树干。巴利
Akukkukajātanti anto asañjātaghanadaṇḍakaṃ. Saṅkhārāpi asārakaṭṭhena kadalikkhandhasadisā, tathā agayhūpagaṭṭhena . Yatheva hi kadalikkhandhato kiñci gahetvā na sakkā gopānasiādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ, upanītampi na tathā hoti, evaṃ saṅkhārāpi na sakkā niccādivasena gahetuṃ, gahitāpi na tathā honti. Yathā ca kadalikkhandho bahupattavaṭṭisamodhāno hoti, evaṃ saṅkhārakkhandho bahudhammasamodhāno. Yathā ca kadalikkhandho nānālakkhaṇo. Aññoyeva hi bāhirāya pattavaṭṭiyā vaṇṇo, añño tato abbhantaraabbhantarānaṃ, evameva saṅkhārakkhandhepi aññadeva phassassa lakkhaṇaṃ, aññā cetanādīnaṃ, samodhānetvā pana saṅkhārakkhandhova vuccatīti evampi saṅkhārakkhandho kadalikkhandhasadiso.
有眼之人是指同时具备肉眼和慧眼这两种眼的人。他的肉眼清净,没有翳膜和瑕疵;他的慧眼能够照见无实性。识也因为无实性而像幻术,同样也因为不可执取性而像幻术。就像幻术短暂、迅速显现一样,识也是如此。识比幻术还要更短暂、更迅速显现。正是依靠同一个心,一个人看起来像来了、像去了、像站着、像坐着;然而来的时候是一个心,去的时候等又是另一个心。这样看来,识也像幻术。幻术欺骗大众,让人执取任何东西,说“这是金子、银子、珍珠”;识也欺骗大众。正是依靠那个心,让人执取为来的、去的、站着的、坐着的。然而来的时候是一个心,去的时候等又是另一个心。这样看来,识也像幻术。巴利
Cakkhumā purisoti maṃsacakkhunā ceva paññācakkhunā cāti dvīhi cakkhūhi cakkhumā. Maṃsacakkhumpi hissa parisuddhaṃ vaṭṭati apagatapaṭalapiḷakaṃ, paññācakkhumpi asārabhāvadassanasamatthaṃ. Viññāṇampi asārakaṭṭhena māyāsadisaṃ, tathā agayhūpagaṭṭhena. Yathā ca māyā ittarā lahupaccupaṭṭhānā, evaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Tañhi tatopi ittaratarañceva lahupaccupaṭṭhānatarañca. Teneva hi cittena puriso āgato viya gato viya ṭhito viya nisinno viya hoti. Aññadeva ca āgamanakāle cittaṃ, aññaṃ gamanakālādīsu. Evampi viññāṇaṃ māyāsadisaṃ. Māyā ca mahājanaṃ vañceti, yaṃkiñcideva ‘‘idaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ rajataṃ muttā’’ti gāhāpeti, viññāṇampi mahājanaṃ vañceti. Teneva hi cittena āgacchantaṃ viya gacchantaṃ viya ṭhitaṃ viya nisinnaṃ viya katvā gāhāpeti. Aññadeva ca āgamane cittaṃ, aññaṃ gamanādīsu. Evampi viññāṇaṃ māyāsadisaṃ.
“具有广大智慧”是指具有细密的智慧,也具有广博而周遍的智慧。“命”是指命根。“暖”是指业生的火界。“成为他人的食物”是指成为各种蛆虫等生物的食物。“这便是(死者的)相续”是说,这样的一个传承过程,直到死尸被弃置到坟场为止。“这是令愚者谈论的幻术”是指:这个被称为识蕴的东西,就是迷惑、欺骗愚痴大众而引发谈论的幻术。“杀手”即杀害者。这个被称为蕴的杀手,从两种道理上说是杀手:一是因为诸蕴互相杀害,二是因为诸蕴存在时,杀害才得以显现。因为当地界坏灭时,是带着其余诸界一起坏灭的;水界等也是如此。当色蕴坏灭时,是带着非色蕴一起坏灭的;同样,在非色蕴中,受蕴等坏灭时,也是带着想蕴等一起坏灭的。这四种非色蕴连同所依的色,应当知道它们就是这样通过互相杀害而具有杀手的性质。再者,当诸蕴存在时,杀害、束缚、砍截等事才会发生;因此,由于诸蕴存在便有杀害,所以也具有杀手的性质。“一切结缚”指所有十种结。“不死处”即涅槃。第三。巴利
Bhūripaññenāti saṇhapaññena ceva vipulavitthatapaññena ca. Āyūti jīvitindriyaṃ. Usmāti kammajatejodhātu. Parabhattanti nānāvidhānaṃ kimigaṇādīnaṃ bhattaṃ hutvā. Etādisāyaṃ santānoti etādisī ayaṃ paveṇī matakassa yāva susānā ghaṭṭīyatīti. Māyāyaṃ bālalāpinīti yvāyaṃ viññāṇakkhandho nāma, ayaṃ bālamahājanalapāpanikamāyā nāma. Vadhakoti dvīhi kāraṇehi ayaṃ khandhasaṅkhāto vadhako aññamaññaghātanenapi, khandhesu sati vadho paññāyatītipi. Ekā hi pathavīdhātu bhijjamānā sesadhātuyo gahetvāva bhijjati, tathā āpodhātuādayo. Rūpakkhandho ca bhijjamāno arūpakkhandhe gahetvāva bhijjati, tathā arūpakkhandhesu vedanādayo saññādike. Cattāropi cete vatthurūpanti evaṃ aññamaññavadhanenettha vadhakatā veditabbā. Khandhesu pana sati vadhabandhanacchedādīni sambhavanti, evaṃ etesu sati vadhabhāvatopi vadhakatā veditabbā. Sabbasaṃyoganti sabbaṃ dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ. Accutaṃ padanti nibbānaṃ. Tatiyaṃ.
4-6. 牛粪团经等的注释巴利
4-6. Gomayapiṇḍasuttādivaṇṇanā
96-98 96-98. 在第四项中,“与恒常相等”是指与须弥山、大地、日月等被认为是恒常的事物相等。“一小团牛粪”是指极少量、只有无患子花那么大小的一小块牛粪。那么,他从哪里得到这个东西的呢?有些人说,是为了涂饰地面而带来的,所以就拿取了。但应该这样理解:这是为了阐明义理,以神通化现出来放在手中的。“获得有身”是指已经获得的身体。“则此梵行住便不可知”:这就是说,名为道梵行的安住将不可了知。因为圣道生起时,是令三界诸行转向灭尽的。如果这样有限的有身是恒常的,那么即使圣道生起,也无法令行之轮转向灭尽,因此梵行住便不能显现。巴利
96-98. Catutthe sassatisamanti sinerumahāpathavīcandimasūriyādīhi sassatīhi samaṃ. Parittaṃ gomayapiṇḍanti appamattakaṃ madhukapupphappamāṇaṃ gomayakhaṇḍaṃ. Kuto panānenetaṃ laddhanti. Paribhaṇḍakaraṇatthāya ābhatato gahitanti eke. Atthassa pana viññāpanatthaṃ iddhiyā abhisaṅkharitvā hatthāruḷhaṃ katanti veditabbanti. Attabhāvapaṭilābhoti paṭiladdhaattabhāvo. Na yidaṃ brahmacariyavāso paññāyethāti ayaṃ maggabrahmacariyavāso nāma na paññāyeyya. Maggo hi tebhūmakasaṅkhāre vivaṭṭento uppajjati. Yadi ca ettako attabhāvo nicco bhaveyya, maggo uppajjitvāpi saṅkhāravaṭṭaṃ vivaṭṭetuṃ na sakkuṇeyyāti brahmacariyavāso na paññāyetha.
现在,如果任何行是恒常的,那么我在大善见王时代所享受的成就就应该是恒常的,而那些也是无常的。为了说明这一点,世尊说了“比丘们,过去我曾是国王……”等话。其中,“以拘舍婆提王都为首”,意思是拘舍婆提王都是那些城市中为首的、最殊胜的。“心材所造”,是用红檀香的心材制成的。而枕头则全部只是线制的。“敷上长毛毯”,是指铺上那种毛长超过四指、用黑色长羊毛织成的毯子,也就是人们所说的“大椅毯”。“敷上白毡”,是指铺上两面都有毛、纯羊毛制成的白毯。“覆以厚花毯”,是指铺上有厚实花纹的羊毛铺盖。“铺设最上迦达利鹿皮敷具”,是指铺上用迦达利鹿皮制成的殊胜垫子。据说,这种垫子是在白布上铺好迦达利鹿皮,再缝合而成的。“具有上盖”,意思是配有上盖,也就是和上面绑着的红色华盖一起。“两端有红枕”,是指头枕和脚枕,也就是说那些躺椅的两端都有红色枕头。“以韦迦亚塔车为首”,在这里,韦迦亚塔是那位国王的车名,车轮的毂是蓝宝石做的,辐条是七宝做的,轮辋是珊瑚做的,轴是白银做的,辖是蓝宝石做的,轭是白银做的。它是那些车乘中第一的、最上的。“敷有白叠褥”,是指铺有白叠褥。“配有银制容器”,是指附有银制的挤奶容器。“千俱胝衣”,是指可以随自己意愿取用。这是指沐浴后站着时,被供养的那些衣服。“饮食供养”,是指应当被供奉的食物。巴利
Idāni sace koci saṅkhāro nicco bhaveyya, mayā mahāsudassanarājakāle anubhūtā sampatti niccā bhaveyya, sāpi ca aniccāti taṃ dassetuṃ bhūtapubbāhaṃ bhikkhu rājā ahosintiādimāha. Tattha kusāvatīrājadhānippamukhānīti kusāvatīrājadhānī tesaṃ nagarānaṃ pamukhā, sabbaseṭṭhāti attho. Sāramayānīti rattacandanasāramayāni. Upadhānaṃ pana sabbesaṃ suttamayameva. Goṇakatthatānīti caturaṅgulādhikalomena kāḷakojavena atthatāni, yaṃ mahāpiṭṭhiyakojavoti vadanti. Paṭakatthatānīti ubhatolomena uṇṇāmayena setakambalena atthatāni. Paṭalikatthatānīti ghanapupphena uṇṇāmayaattharaṇena atthatāni. Kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇānīti kadalimigacammamayena uttamapaccattharaṇena atthatāni. Taṃ kira paccattharaṇaṃ setavatthassa upari kadalimigacammaṃ attharitvā sibbetvā karonti. Sauttaracchadānīti saha uttaracchadena, upari baddhena rattavitānena saddhinti attho. Ubhatolohitakūpadhānīti sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti pallaṅkānaṃ ubhatolohitakūpadhānāni. Vejayantarathappamukhānīti ettha vejayanto nāma tassa rañño ratho, yassa cakkānaṃ indanīlamaṇimayā nābhi, sattaratanamayā arā, pavāḷamayā nemi, rajatamayo akkho, indanīlamaṇimayaṃ upakkharaṃ, rajatamayaṃ kubbaraṃ. So tesaṃ rathānaṃ pamukho aggo. Dukūlasandānānīti dukūlasantharāni. Kaṃsūpadhāraṇānīti rajatamayadohabhājanāni. Vatthakoṭisahassānīti yathārucitaṃ paribhuñjissatīti nhatvā ṭhitakāle upanītavatthāneva sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhattābhihāroti abhiharitabbabhattaṃ.
我那时所住的地方,意思是:我居住的只有那一座城,其余城中住着儿女等人和奴仆。楼阁、尖顶屋等也是这样。在躺椅等物中,我自己只享用一件,其余的是儿女等人受用的。在女眷中,只有一位近身侍候,其余的都只是随从眷属。毗离咤种,是指刹帝利女与婆罗门所生,或婆罗门女与刹帝利所生的孩子。我所穿着,是指我只穿一套衣服,这说明其余的衣服是供那一百六十八万随行人穿的。我所吃,是指我最多只吃一纳利饭,这说明其余的食物是提供给那八十四万随行人的,因为一锅饭足够十个人吃。巴利
Yamahaṃ tena samayena ajjhāvasāmīti yattha vasāmi, taṃ ekaññeva nagaraṃ hoti, avasesesu puttadhītādayo ceva dāsamanussā ca vasiṃsu. Pāsādakūṭāgārādīsupi eseva nayo. Pallaṅkādīsu ekaṃyeva sayaṃ paribhuñjati, sesā puttādīnaṃ paribhogā honti. Itthīsu ekāva paccupaṭṭhāti, sesā parivāramattā honti. Velāmikāti khattiyassa vā brāhmaṇiyā, brāhmaṇassa vā khattiyāniyā kucchismiṃ jātā. Paridahāmīti ekaṃyeva dussayugaṃ nivāsemi, sesāni parivāretvā vicarantānaṃ asītisahassādhikānaṃ soḷasannaṃ purisasatasahassānaṃ hontīti dasseti. Bhuñjāmīti paramappamāṇena nāḷikodanamattaṃ bhuñjāmi, sesaṃ parivāretvā vicarantānaṃ cattālīsasahassādhikānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ purisasatasahassānaṃ hotīti dasseti. Ekathālipāko hi dasannaṃ janānaṃ pahoti.
世尊这样展示了善见王时代的富贵圆满之后,接着要显示它的无常,于是说了“诸比丘,确实如此……”等话。其中,“已经变坏”是指:因为失去了原本的状态,就像熄灭了的灯一样,到了无法指认的地步。“诸比丘,诸行这样无常”:因为诸行生起之后又归于消失,所以是无常。讲到这里,世尊就像一个在一棵一百肘高的占巴花树上绑好梯子、爬上去采了占巴花、然后一边解开梯子一边下来的人。同样,世尊先是绑好梯子,登上那高过无数百千俱胝年的善见王富贵圆满,在圆满的顶端取到了无常相,然后一边解开梯子一边下来——他就是以这样的方式降下来。“这样不恒久”:就像水泡等一样,没有恒常不变的性质。“这样无依靠”:就像梦中喝到的水、涂抹的檀香一样,没有任何可依靠之处。这样,在这部经里宣说了无常相。第五经中,一切都按已经说过的方式。第六经是依照将要觉悟者的意趣而说。第四经等……巴利
Iti imaṃ mahāsudassanakāle sampattiṃ dassetvā idāni tassā aniccataṃ dassento iti kho bhikkhūtiādimāha. Tattha vipariṇatāti pakatijahanena nibbutapadīpo viya apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gatā. Evaṃ aniccā kho bhikkhu saṅkhārāti evaṃ hutvāabhāvaṭṭhena aniccā. Ettāvatā bhagavā yathā nāma puriso satahatthubbedhe campakarukkhe nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā abhiruhitvā campakapupphaṃ ādāya nisseṇiṃ muñcanto otareyya, evamevaṃ nisseṇiṃ bandhanto viya anekavassakoṭisatasahassubbedhaṃ mahāsudassanasampattiṃ āruyha sampattimatthake ṭhitaṃ aniccalakkhaṇaṃ ādāya nisseṇiṃ muñcanto viya otiṇṇo. Evaṃ addhuvāti evaṃ udakapubbuḷādayo viya dhuvabhāvarahitā. Evaṃ anassāsikāti evaṃ supinake pītapānīyaṃ viya anulittacandanaṃ viya ca assāsavirahitā. Iti imasmiṃ sutte aniccalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Pañcame sabbaṃ vuttanayameva. Chaṭṭhaṃ tathā bujjhanakassa ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Catutthādīni.
第七 系狗绳经的注释巴利
7. Gaddulabaddhasuttavaṇṇanā
99 第七经中,“那个大海”:当第五个太阳升起时,大海就会干涸。“苦的终结”:对于没有通达四圣谛、被无明遮蔽的众生,我不说他们的轮回之苦有终结、有尽头。“被狗绳拴住的”:就是被狗绳拴住的狗。“木桩”:钉在地上的大木桩。“柱子”:埋好立起来的柱子。“同样地”:在这里,狗好比依赖轮回的愚痴凡夫,狗绳好比邪见,柱子好比有身。就像被狗绳拴在柱子上的狗会绕着柱子转,被邪见和渴爱绑在有身上的凡夫绕着有身转,也应知道是同样的。第七经终。巴利
99. Sattame yaṃ mahāsamuddoti yasmiṃ samaye pañcame sūriye uṭṭhite mahāsamuddo ussussati. Dukkhassa antakiriyanti cattāri saccāni appaṭivijjhitvā avijjāya nivutānaṃyeva sataṃ vaṭṭadukkhassa antakiriyaṃ paricchedaṃ na vadāmi. Sā gaddulabaddhoti gaddulena baddhasunakho. Khīleti pathaviyaṃ ākoṭite mahākhīle. Thambheti nikhaṇitvā ṭhapite thambhe. Evameva khoti ettha sunakho viya vaṭṭanissito bālo, gaddulo viya diṭṭhi, thambho viya sakkāyo, gaddularajjuyā thambhe upanibaddhasunakhassa thambhānuparivattanaṃ viya diṭṭhitaṇhāya sakkāye baddhassa puthujjanassa sakkāyānuparivattanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sattamaṃ.
第八 第二狗缚经注释巴利
8. Dutiyagaddulabaddhasuttavaṇṇanā
100 在第八经中,所谓“因此”,是因为被邪见的狗绳所系、被渴爱的绳索绑在有身之柱上的愚痴凡夫,在一切行住坐卧中,都只是依着五蕴而运转;又因为长久以来,这颗心被贪、嗔、痴所染污,所以说“因此”。所谓“心的染污”:即使刚洗浴干净的众生,也会因为心的染污而染污;即使身体沾满污垢的人,也会因为心的清净而清净。因此,古代圣者们说:巴利
100. Aṭṭhame tasmāti yasmā diṭṭhigaddulanissitāya taṇhārajjuyā sakkāyathambhe upanibaddho vaṭṭanissito bālaputhujjano sabbiriyāpathesu khandhapañcakaṃ nissāyeva pavattati, yasmā vā dīgharattamidaṃ cittaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ rāgena dosena mohena, tasmā. Cittasaṃkilesāti sunhātāpi hi sattā cittasaṃkileseneva saṃkilissanti, malaggahitasarīrāpi cittassa vodānattā visujjhanti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
当色被染污时,青年们就跟着被染污;
诸色清净,他们便得清净——这不是大仙所说的。
当心被染污时,青年们便随之染污;
心清净时,它们便得清净——这是大仙所说的。巴利
‘‘Rūpamhi saṃkiliṭṭhamhi, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Rūpe suddhe visujjhanti, anakkhātaṃ mahesinā. ‘‘Cittamhi saṃkiliṭṭhamhi, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Citte suddhe visujjhanti, iti vuttaṃ mahesinā’’ti.
所谓“行”,就是心在游走活动。所谓“算数者”,指的是婆罗门外道。他们画成图册,在里面按善趣和恶趣画出种种成功与失败的情形,标明“造了这种业就得到这种结果,造了那种业就得到那种结果”,然后拿着那张图到处游走展示。“由心而画成”:就像画师先在心里构思好再画出来一样,这是经过心里构思才造作出来的,所以叫“由心所构思的”。“心比心更心”:为了给那颗心寻找方法的心,比那颗心更加心。“畜生道的有情也是由心所画成的”:这是说由业心所造作。不过,那些鹌鹑、鹧鸪之类的动物,并没有发愿说“我们要变成这样的心”。是业力把它们引向相应的母胎,而母胎就是它们心的状态的根源。因为一旦入胎,众生就会和同胎类的其他众生拥有相似的心。因此应当知道:心的状态是由胎成就的,而胎是由业成就的。巴利
Caraṇaṃ nāma cittanti vicaraṇacittaṃ. Saṅkhā nāma brāhmaṇapāsaṇḍikā honti, te paṭakoṭṭhakaṃ katvā tattha nānappakārā sugatiduggativasena sampattivipattiyo lekhāpetvā, ‘‘imaṃ kammaṃ katvā idaṃ paṭilabhati, idaṃ katvā ida’’nti dassentā taṃ cittaṃ gahetvā vicaranti. Citteneva cittitanti cittakārena cintetvā katattā cittena cintitaṃ nāma. Cittaññeva cittataranti tassa cittassa upāyapariyesanacittaṃ tatopi cittataraṃ. Tiracchānagatā pāṇā citteneva cittitāti kammacitteneva cittitā. Taṃ pana kammacittaṃ ime vaṭṭakatittirādayo ‘‘evaṃ cittā bhavissāmā’’ti āyūhantā nāma natthi. Kammaṃ pana yoniṃ upaneti, yonimūlako tesaṃ cittabhāvo. Yoniupagatā hi sattā taṃtaṃyonikehi sadisacittāva honti. Iti yonisiddho cittabhāvo, kammasiddhā yonīti veditabbā.
另外,这个“心”并非只是俱生心,由于能产生种种不同的心——依俱生法而有的心性、依地而有的心性、依依处而有的心性、依门而有的心性、依所缘而有的心性,以及以业的不同为根源而有的性别不同、想不同、称呼不同等等——从这一点来说,它比畜生道的心更加是“心”。应当这样来理解“更心”。巴利
Apica cittaṃ nāmetaṃ sahajātaṃ sahajātadhammacittatāya bhūmicittatāya vatthucittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānattamūlakānaṃ liṅganānattasaññānānattavohāranānattādīnaṃ anekavidhānaṃ cittānaṃ nipphādanatāyapi tiracchānagatacittato cittatarameva veditabbaṃ.
染工用染料在衣服上显出颜色。如果他手艺不好,就会染出不可爱的颜色;如果手艺好,就会染出可爱、好看的颜色。同样,凡夫用不善心或与智不相应的善心,就会造出缺少眼具足等功德、丑陋的色;用与智相应的善心,就会造出具备眼具足等功德、端正的色。第八。巴利
Rajakoti vatthesu raṅgena rūpasamuṭṭhāpanako. So pana acheko amanāpaṃ rūpaṃ karoti, cheko manāpaṃ dassanīyaṃ, evameva puthujjano akusalacittena vā ñāṇavippayuttakusalena vā cakkhusampadādivirahitaṃ virūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, ñāṇasampayuttakusalena cakkhusampadādisampannaṃ abhirūpaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第9经《斧柄经》的注释巴利
9. Vāsijaṭasuttavaṇṇanā
101 101. 第九经里说“诸比丘,就像母鸡的蛋”等等,这是按黑分和白分说了两个譬喻。其中,黑分的譬喻不能成就这里的意思,另一个譬喻才能成就。白分譬喻的意思应当这样理解:“就像”是表示譬喻的词,“也”是表示可能、设想的词。两者合起来就是“就像……那样,诸比丘”,这是为了显示这个意思。“母鸡的蛋,或八枚,或十枚,或十二枚”,这里虽然说鸡的蛋有这些数目,但鸡实际下的蛋可能比这少或多,只是为了说话顺口才这样说,因为世间说话就是这样顺口。“那些蛋”就是“那些蛋存在”或“那些蛋应当存在”的意思。“被母鸡好好地孵卧”,是指那只生养它们的母鸡张开翅膀,卧在那些蛋上面,好好地孵卧。“好好地遍暖”,是指它按时令让蛋得到适宜的温度,从四周充分地暖着它们。“好好地遍育”,是指它按时从四周充分地培育它们,让它们沾上母鸡的气味。“即使那只母鸡”,即使那只母鸡做了这三种动作、没有懈怠,也不会生起这样的愿望:“愿我的小鸡用脚爪尖或嘴尖啄破蛋壳,平安地破壳而出。”“但那些小鸡确实能够”,就是说那些小鸡确实能像所说的那样平安地破壳而出。因为那些蛋被母鸡用这三种方式守护着,所以不会腐坏;蛋里湿润的液体也会耗尽,蛋壳变得很薄,小鸡的脚爪尖和嘴尖也变得坚硬,它们自己也逐渐成熟;因为蛋壳薄了,外面的光就能透到里面。于是它们想:“我们这么久蜷着手脚,躺在狭窄的地方,现在外面有光透进来,这下我们该有舒服的住处了。”它们想出来,就用脚踢蛋壳,伸出脖子,蛋壳于是裂成两半。然后它们振动翅膀,随着当时的时机鸣叫,就出来了;出来后,四处游走,让村庄和田野显得更加美好。巴利
101. Navame seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, kukkuṭiyā aṇḍānīti imā kaṇhapakkhasukkapakkhavasena dve upamā vuttā. Tāsu kaṇhapakkhaupamā atthassa asādhikā, itarā sādhikāti. Sukkapakkhaupamāya evaṃ attho veditabbo – seyyathāti opammatthe nipāto, apīti sambhāvanatthe. Ubhayenāpi seyyathā nāma, bhikkhaveti dasseti. Kukkuṭiyā aṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dasa vā dvādasa vāti ettha pana kiñcāpi kukkuṭiyā vuttappakārato ūnādhikānipi aṇḍāni honti, vacanasiliṭṭhatāya pana evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hoti. Tānassūti tāni assu, tāni bhaveyyunti attho. Kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitānīti tāya ca janettiyā kukkuṭiyā pakkhe pasāretvā tesaṃ upari sayantiyā sammā adhisayitāni. Sammā pariseditānīti kālena kālaṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā suṭṭhu samantato seditāni usmīkatāni. Sammā paribhāvitānīti kālena kālaṃ suṭṭhu samantato bhāvitāni, kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānīti attho. Kiñcāpi tassā kukkuṭiyāti tassā kukkuṭiyā iminā tividhakiriyākaraṇena appamādaṃ katvā kiñcāpi na evaṃ icchā upajjeyya. Athakho bhabbāva teti atha kho te kukkuṭapotakā vuttanayena sotthinā abhinibbhijjituṃ bhabbāva. Te hi yasmā tāya kukkuṭiyā evaṃ tīhākārehi tāni aṇḍāni paripāliyamānāni na pūtīni honti, yo nesaṃ allasineho, sopi pariyādānaṃ gacchati, kapālaṃ tanukaṃ hoti, pādanakhasikhā ca mukhatuṇḍakañca kharaṃ hoti, sayampi pariṇāmaṃ gacchanti, kapālassa tanuttā bahi āloko anto paññāyati, tasmā ‘‘ciraṃ vata mayaṃ saṅkuṭitahatthapādā sambādhe sayimhā, ayañca bahi āloko dissati, ettha dāni no sukhavihāro bhavissatī’’ti nikkhamitukāmā hutvā kapālaṃ pādena paharanti, gīvaṃ pasārenti, tato taṃ kapālaṃ dvedhā bhijjati. Atha te pakkhe vidhunantā taṃkhaṇānurūpaṃ viravantā nikkhamantiyeva, nikkhamitvā ca gāmakkhettaṃ upasobhayamānā vicaranti.
同样地这句话,是对譬喻的对应说明。应当这样把譬喻和含义配合起来理解:就像母鸡对鸡蛋做三种动作的那段时间,是这位比丘精勤修习的时期;就像母鸡完成三种动作后鸡蛋不会腐坏,精勤修习的比丘完成三种随观后,观智不会退失;就像母鸡做三种动作会耗尽蛋里湿润的养分,那位比丘完成三种随观,就会耗尽贯穿三有的贪爱湿润;就像蛋壳变薄,那位比丘的无明蛋壳也会变薄;就像小鸡的爪尖、嘴尖和喙变得坚硬粗糙,比丘的观智也会变得锐利、坚硬、清净、勇猛;就像小鸡成熟转变的时期,那是比丘观智成熟、增长、入胎的时期;就像小鸡用爪尖或嘴尖啄破蛋壳、振动翅膀、安全破壳而出的时期,应当这样理解:比丘令观智入胎后,在游化时得到相应的适宜季节、适宜食物、适宜的人、适宜的闻法,在同一座垫上增长观修,依靠次第证得的阿罗汉道,啄破无明蛋壳,振动神通之翼,安全证得阿罗汉果的时期。又像母鸡知道小鸡已经成熟,就啄破蛋壳;同样,佛陀了知那位比丘的智慧已经成熟,世尊也会——巴利
Evameva khoti idaṃ opammasampaṭipādanaṃ. Taṃ evaṃ atthena saṃsanditvā veditabbaṃ – tassā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍesu tividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ viya hi imassa bhikkhuno bhāvānuyogaṃ anuyuttakālo, kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyāsampādanena aṇḍānaṃ apūtibhāvo viya bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttassa bhikkhuno tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa aparihāni, tassā tividhakiriyākaraṇena allasinehapariyādānaṃ viya tassa bhikkhuno tividhānupassanāsampādanena bhavattayānugatanikantisinehapariyādānaṃ, aṇḍakapālānaṃ tanubhāvo viya tassa bhikkhuno avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo, kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pādanakhasikhamukhatuṇḍakānaṃ thaddhakharabhāvo viya bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇassa tikkhakharavippasanna sūrabhāvo, kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pariṇāmakālo viya bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakālo vaḍḍhitakālo gabbhaggahaṇakālo, kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā pakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā abhinibbhidākālo viya tassa bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā vicarantassa tajjātikaṃ utusappāyaṃ vā bhojanasappāyaṃ vā puggalasappāyaṃ vā dhammassavanasappāyaṃ vā labhitvā ekāsane nisinnasseva vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa anupubbādhigatena arahattamaggena avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhiññāpakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā arahattapattakālo veditabbo. Yathā pana kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pariṇatabhāvaṃ ñatvā mātāpi aṇḍakosaṃ bhindati, evaṃ tathārūpassa bhikkhuno ñāṇaparipākaṃ ñatvā satthāpi –
斩断对自己的爱恋,就像用手掐断秋天的白莲花。
唯应修习此寂静之道,即善逝所教导的涅槃。巴利
‘‘Ucchinda sinehamattano, kumudaṃ sāradikaṃva pāṇinā; Santimaggameva brūhaya, nibbānaṃ sugatena desita’’nti. (dha. pa. 285) –
他用前面的方法把光明扩散开来,再以偈颂击破无明卵壳。偈颂结束时,他破除无明卵壳,证得阿罗汉果。从那时起,就像那些小鸡在村庄田地里走动,让那里更加好看一样,这位大漏尽者也进入以涅槃为所缘的果等至,在僧园中走动,让僧园更加好看。巴利
Ādinā nayena obhāsaṃ pharitvā gāthāya avijjaṇḍakosaṃ paharati. So gāthāpariyosāne avijjaṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tato paṭṭhāya yathā te kukkuṭapotakā gāmakkhettaṃ upasobhayamānā tattha vicaranti, evaṃ ayampi mahākhīṇāsavo nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā saṅghārāmaṃ upasobhayamāno vicarati.
“木匠的”是指木匠。因为他拿着一种叫“悬锤”的线锤,用来去掉木材上的节瘤,所以被称为“木匠”。“在斧柄上”是指手握斧柄的地方。“今日我的漏已尽这么多”:对出家人来说,通过出家的略说、教示、遍问、如理作意以及履行义务,诸漏时时刻刻都在灭尽。不过,当诸漏这样灭尽时,他并不会生起这样的智:“今天灭了这么多,昨天灭了这么多。”这就是这段话的意思。通过这个譬喻,说明了观修的功德。“在冬季时”是指在冬天的时候。“消散”是指在坚固性方面减退。巴利
Palagaṇḍassāti vaḍḍhakissa. So hi olambakasaṅkhātaṃ palaṃ dhāretvā dārūnaṃ gaṇḍaṃ haratīti palagaṇḍoti vuccati. Vāsijaṭeti vāsidaṇḍakassa gahaṇaṭṭhāne. Ettakaṃ vata me ajja āsavānaṃ khīṇanti pabbajitassa hi pabbajjāsaṅkhepena uddesena paripucchāya yoniso manasikārena vattapaṭipattiyā ca niccakālaṃ āsavā khīyanti. Evaṃ khīyamānānaṃ pana tesaṃ ‘‘ettakaṃ ajja khīṇaṃ, ettakaṃ hiyyo’’ti evamassa ñāṇaṃ na hotīti attho. Imāya upamāya vipassanāyānisaṃso dīpito. Hemantikenāti hemantasamayena. Paṭippassambhantīti thirabhāvena parihāyanti.
同样地,“诸比丘”等:在这里,应当把教法看作大海,把瑜伽行者看作船。船在大海中逐渐损耗,就像这位比丘在不满五年的期间里,在阿阇梨和亲教师身边安住修学;船被大海的水侵蚀,系缚变得细弱,就像比丘通过出家略说、诵习和遍问等,使诸结变得薄弱;船被拖上陆地的时候,就像比丘脱离依止后,取业处而住在林野中;白天被风吹日晒而干透,就像以观智使渴爱的润泽干涸;夜晚被霜露之水浸湿,就像依业处生起的喜与愉悦滋润内心;日夜被风吹日晒和霜露之水反复侵损,又干又湿,系缚变得羸弱,就像某一天获得适宜的季节等条件后,以观智、喜和愉悦使诸结更加羸弱;雨季的云,就像阿拉汉道的智;被雨水浸蚀后,船的系缚朽坏,就像正在观修的人,依色七法等增长观修,在业处逐渐消退、逐渐耗尽之际,某一天获得适宜的季节等条件,结跏趺坐,在一坐之中证得阿拉汉果;系缚已朽坏的船暂时停留在某处,就像诸结已尽的阿拉汉,在利益大众时,尽其寿命而住;系缚已朽坏的船逐渐破裂,归于不可知的状态,就像漏尽者因所执取的五蕴破裂,般涅槃于无余涅槃界,归于不可知。以此譬喻说明诸结的羸弱。第九。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha mahāsamuddo viya sāsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nāvā viya yogāvacaro, nāvāya mahāsamudde pariyādānaṃ viya imassa bhikkhuno ūnapañcavassakāle ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ santike vicaraṇaṃ, nāvāya mahāsamuddodakena khajjamānānaṃ bandhanānaṃ tanubhāvo viya bhikkhuno pabbajjāsaṅkhepena uddesaparipucchādīhi ceva saṃyojanānaṃ tanubhāvo, nāvāya thale ukkhittakālo viya bhikkhuno nissayamuccakassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā araññe vasanakālo, divā vātātapena saṃsussanaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇena taṇhāsnehasaṃsussanaṃ, rattiṃ himodakena temanaṃ viya kammaṭṭhānaṃ nissāya uppannena pītipāmojjena cittatemanaṃ, rattindivaṃ vātātapena ceva himodakena ca parisukkhaparitintānaṃ bandhanānaṃ dubbalabhāvo viya ekadivasaṃ utusappāyādīni laddhā vipassanāñāṇapītipāmojjehi saṃyojanānaṃ bhiyyosomattāya dubbalabhāvo, pāvussakamegho viya arahattamaggañāṇaṃ , meghavuṭṭhiudakena nāvāya bandhe pūtibhāvo viya āraddhavipassakassa rūpasattakādivasena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa okkhāyamāne pakkhāyamāne kammaṭṭhāne ekadivasaṃ utusappāyādīni laddhā ekapallaṅkena nisinnassa arahattaphalādhigamo, pūtibandhanāvāya kañci kālaṃ ṭhānaṃ viya khīṇasaṃyojanassa arahato mahājanaṃ anuggaṇhantassa yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhānaṃ, pūtibandhanāvāya anupubbena bhijjitvā apaṇṇattikabhāvūpagamo viya khīṇāsavassa upādiṇṇakkhandhabhedena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa apaṇṇattikabhāvūpagamoti imāya upamāya saṃyojanānaṃ dubbalatā dīpitā. Navamaṃ.
第10章 无常想经的注释巴利
10. Aniccasaññāsuttavaṇṇanā
102 第十经中,“无常想”是指:当人不断修习“无常、无常”时生起的想。“遍尽”就是耗尽。“一切我慢”指九种我慢。“根之相续蔓”指不断延伸而安住的根。就像大犁对应无常想,细小的根蔓对应烦恼;农夫耕地时用犁把那些根蔓破开,同样,瑜伽行者修习无常想时,也以无常想智破除烦恼——这就是这里譬喻的对应关系。巴利
102. Dasame aniccasaññāti aniccaṃ aniccanti bhāventassa uppannasaññā. Pariyādiyatīti khepayati. Sabbaṃ asmimānanti navavidhaṃ asmimānaṃ. Mūlasantānakānīti santānetvā ṭhitamūlāni. Mahānaṅgalaṃ viya hi aniccasaññā, khuddānukhuddakāni mūlasantānakāni viya kilesā, yathā kassako kasanto naṅgalena tāni padāleti, evaṃ yogī aniccasaññaṃ bhāvento aniccasaññāñāṇena kilese padāletīti idamettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ.
抖落是指向下抖掉。彻底抖落是指拍打去除。丢弃是指拍打之后扔掉。这里也一样,应当把烦恼比作要割除的草,把无常想的智慧比作割除和丢弃,用这个意思来对应譬喻。巴利
Odhunātīti heṭṭhā dhunāti. Niddhunātīti papphoṭeti. Nicchoṭetīti papphoṭetvā chaḍḍeti. Idhāpi pabbajāni viya kilesā, lāyanaṃ nicchoṭanaṃ viya aniccasaññāñāṇanti iminā atthena upamā saṃsandetabbā.
芒果串的蒂被切断,指的是用锋利的剃刀刀刃把蒂割断。芒果跟着它走,意思是它们追随着那串芒果;当那串芒果掉下来时,芒果们就都落到了地上。在这里,芒果串好比烦恼,锋利的剃刀好比无常想。就像用剃刀切断芒果串时,所有芒果都掉到地上一样,同样,以无常想的智慧斩断作为烦恼根本的无明时,一切烦恼就都被彻底根除了。这就是譬喻的对应关系。巴利
Vaṇṭacchinnāyāti tiṇhena khurappena vaṇṭacchinnāya. Tadanvayāni bhavantīti taṃ ambapiṇḍiṃ anugacchanti, tassā patamānāya ambāni bhūmiyaṃ patanti. Idhāpi ambapiṇḍi viya kilesā, tiṇhakhurappo viya aniccasaññā, yathā khurappena chinnāya ambapiṇḍiyā sabbāni ambāni bhūmiyaṃ patanti, evaṃ aniccasaññāñāṇena kilesānaṃ mūlabhūtāya avijjāya chinnāya sabbakilesā samugghātaṃ gacchantīti, idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ.
“至顶”是指到达顶端。“向顶”是指以进入顶端的方式而倾向于顶端。“于顶会合”是指在顶端会合而安住。在这里,顶端好比无常想,椽子好比四地层次的善法。就像所有椽子以顶端为最高处,同样,在诸善法中,无常想是最上首的。有人问:无常想不是世间法吗?它对于世间善法来说可以是最上首,但对于出世间善法,怎么能说它是最上首呢?应当知道,因为它能成为获得出世间法的原因,所以也可说它是最上首。按照这个道理,在所有譬喻中都应当这样理解譬喻的对应关系。在这里,前面三个譬喻说明无常想的作用,后面四个譬喻说明它的力量。第十。巴利
Kūṭaṅgamāti kūṭaṃ gacchanti. Kūṭaninnāti kūṭaṃ pavisanabhāvena kūṭe ninnā. Kūṭasamosaraṇāti kūṭe samosaritvā ṭhitā. Idhāpi kūṭaṃ viya aniccasaññā, gopānasiyo viya catubhūmakakusaladhammā, yathā sabbagopānasīnaṃ kūṭaṃ aggaṃ, evaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ aniccasaññā aggā. Nanu ca aniccasaññā lokiyā, sā lokiyakusalānaṃ tāva aggaṃ hotu, lokuttarānaṃ kathaṃ agganti? Tesampi paṭilābhakaraṇatthena agganti veditabbā. Iminā upāyena sabbāsu upamāsu opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Purimāhi panettha tīhi aniccasaññāya kiccaṃ, pacchimāhi balanti. Dasamaṃ.
《边际经》的注释巴利
1. Antasuttavaṇṇanā
103 103. 在《边际品》的第一经里,“边际”指的是部分、类别。这部经是依四圣谛并结合五蕴,再随顺那些能觉悟者的意乐,用“边际”这个词来说的。第一。巴利
103. Antavaggassa paṭhame antāti koṭṭhāsā. Idaṃ suttaṃ catusaccavasena pañcakkhandhe yojetvā antoti vacanena bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ.
《苦经》等经的注释巴利
2-3. Dukkhasuttādivaṇṇanā
104-105 104-105. 第二次也是把五蕴结合四圣谛来套用,这是为了随顺那些通过“苦”而觉悟的人的根性来说的。第三次同样,是为了随顺那些通过“有身”而觉悟的人的根性来说的。第二和第三。巴利
104-105. Dutiyampi pañcakkhandhe catusaccavasena yojetvā dukkhanti bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena kathitaṃ. Tatiyampi tatheva sakkāyoti bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena kathitaṃ. Dutiyatatiyāni.
《应遍知经》的注释巴利
4. Pariññeyyasuttavaṇṇanā
106 106. 在第四种中,“应遍知”指的是应当遍知、应当超越的诸法。“遍知”就是超越。“已遍知者”指的是依靠那种遍知,已经遍知、已经超越而安住的人。通过“贪尽”等语句,开示了涅槃。第四。巴利
106. Catutthe pariññeyyeti parijānitabbe samatikkamitabbe. Pariññanti samatikkamaṃ. Pariññātāvinti tāya pariññāya parijānitvā samatikkamitvā ṭhitaṃ. Rāgakkhayotiādīhi nibbānaṃ dassitaṃ. Catutthaṃ.
《沙门经》等的注释巴利
5-10. Samaṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
107-112 从第五部经开始的四部经里,讲的是四圣谛;第九部和第十部经里,讲的是断除烦恼。以上是第五部等经的内容。巴利
107-112. Pañcamādīsu catūsu cattāri saccāni kathitāni. Navamadasamesu kilesappahānanti. Pañcamādīni.
第12品 说法者品巴利
12. Dhammakathikavaggo
《无明经》等经的注释巴利
1-2. Avijjāsuttādivaṇṇanā
113-114 113-114. 在《说法者品》的第一经里,“陷于无明”的意思是:只要具备了那种对四圣谛无知的无明,就算“陷于无明”。第二经也是同样的道理。第一、第二经(的注释到此结束)。巴利
113-114. Dhammakathikavaggassa paṭhame ettāvatā ca avijjāgato hotīti yāvatā imāya catūsu saccesu aññāṇabhūtāya avijjāya samannāgato, ettāvatā avijjāgato hotīti attho. Dutiyepi eseva nayo. Paṭhamadutiyāni.
3. 《说法者经》的注释巴利
3. Dhammakathikasuttavaṇṇanā
115 在第三部经里,通过第一问区分出“说法者”,通过第二问区分出“有学地”,通过第三问区分出“无学地”——就这样,针对所问的“说法者”作出区分后,开示了两种地。第三。巴利
115. Tatiye paṭhamena dhammakathiko, dutiyena sekhabhūmi, tatiyena asekhabhūmīti evaṃ dhammakathikaṃ pucchitena visesetvā dve bhūmiyo kathitā. Tatiyaṃ.
第四部《第二说法者经》的注释巴利
4. Dutiyadhammakathikasuttavaṇṇanā
116 在第四部分,针对三个问题,给出了三个回答。第四部分完。巴利
116. Catutthe tissannampi pucchānaṃ tīṇi vissajjanāni kathitāni. Catutthaṃ.
5-9. 《缚经》等经的注释巴利
5-9. Bandhanasuttādivaṇṇanā
117-121 117-121. 在第五部经里,“不见此岸”中的“此岸”指的是轮回,他看不见轮回。“不见彼岸”中的“彼岸”指的是涅槃,他看不见涅槃。“被束缚”是说:被烦恼的束缚捆住,于是衰老、死亡,从这个世界去到另一个世界。这部经讲的是轮回之苦。第六部经等的内容浅显易懂。第五部经等的内容就是这些。巴利
117-121. Pañcame atīradassīti tīraṃ vuccati vaṭṭaṃ, taṃ na passati. Apāradassīti pāraṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, taṃ na passati. Baddhoti kilesabandhanena baddho hutvā jīyati ca mīyati ca asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ gacchatīti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭadukkhaṃ kathitanti. Chaṭṭhādīni uttānatthāneva. Pañcamādīni.
第10 持戒者经注释巴利
10. Sīlavantasuttavaṇṇanā
122 122. 在第十经中,对于“无常”等词:以“曾经存在而后消失”的方式,从无常的角度观察;以逼迫的方式,从苦的角度观察;以疾病之义,从病的角度观察;以内腐之义,从痈疮的角度观察;因为那些痈疮的助缘,或者因为穿刺、掘凿之义,从箭的角度观察;以苦之义,从祸患的角度观察;由不调和的大种所引生的疾病之助缘义,从疾的角度观察;以非自己所拥有的义,从外的角度观察;以崩坏之义,从坏灭的角度观察;以有情空无之义,从空的角度观察;以无我之义,从无我的角度观察。于此,当知以“从无常、从坏灭”二词为无常作意,以“从空、从无我”二词为无我作意,其余诸词为苦作意。此中其余内容显而易见。第十经。巴利
122. Dasame aniccatotiādīsu hutvā abhāvākārena aniccato, paṭipīḷanākārena dukkhato, ābādhaṭṭhena rogato, antodosaṭṭhena gaṇḍato, tesaṃ tesaṃ gaṇḍānaṃ paccayabhāvena vā khaṇanaṭṭhena vā sallato dukkhaṭṭhena aghato, visabhāgamahābhūtasamuṭṭhānaābādhapaccayaṭṭhena ābādhato, asakaṭṭhena parato, palujjanaṭṭhena palokato, sattasuññataṭṭhena suññato, attābhāvena anattato. Evamettha ‘‘aniccato palokato’’ti dvīhi padehi aniccamanasikāro, ‘‘suññato anattato’’ti dvīhi anattamanasikāro, sesehi dukkhamanasikāro vuttoti veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dasamaṃ.
第11 多闻者经的注释巴利
11. Sutavantasuttavaṇṇanā
123 第十一经也是这样。因为在第十经里,“持戒者”指的是四遍清净戒;而在这里,“多闻者”指的是对业处的听闻,差别就在这里。第十一经。巴利
123. Tathā ekādasame. Dasamasmiñhi ‘‘sīlavatā’’ti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ vuttaṃ, idha sutavatāti kammaṭṭhānasutaṃ idameva nānākaraṇaṃ. Ekādasamaṃ.
12-13. 《劫经》等的解说巴利
12-13. Kappasuttādivaṇṇanā
124-125 第十二经和第十三经跟《教诫罗睺罗经》的内容相近。第十二经、第十三经。巴利
124-125. Dvādasamaterasamāni rāhulovādasadisānevāti. Dvādasamaterasamāni.
1-10.《集起法经》等的注释巴利
1-10. Samudayadhammasuttādivaṇṇanā
126-135 126-135.《无明品》的意思很清楚。因为在这一品里,所有经都只讲了四圣谛。巴利
126-135. Avijjāvaggo uttānatthova. Imasmiñhi vagge sabbasuttesu catusaccameva kathitaṃ.
第十四品 热灰品巴利
14. Kukkuḷavaggo
《瞿瞿罗经》等的解说巴利
1-13. Kukkuḷasuttādivaṇṇanā
136-149 136-149. 在“火聚品”的第一经里,“火聚”指的是烧得滚烫、炽烈燃烧,就像一大堆烧红的灰烬那样,带着极大的灼热。这部经里讲的是苦的特相,其余几部经讲的则是无常相等。而所有这些经,都是根据各个不同人的根性和意乐分别来说的。巴利
136-149. Kukkuḷavaggassa paṭhame kukkuḷanti santattaṃ ādittaṃ chārikarāsiṃ viya mahāpariḷāhaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ, sesesu aniccalakkhaṇādīni. Sabbāni cetāni pāṭiyekkaṃ puggalajjhāsayena kathitānīti.
1-9. 自身经等的注释巴利
1-9. Ajjhattasuttādivaṇṇanā
150-158 150-158. 在《见品》的第一经里,“以什么为依托”意思就是“以什么为缘”。在第二经里,“以什么为执取”意思是“执取什么之后,把它当作缘”。在第三经等经里,“见”等说法,是依照个人的意乐而说的。第一经等也是如此。巴利
150-158. Diṭṭhivaggassa paṭhame kiṃ upādāyāti kiṃ paṭicca. Dutiye kiṃ abhinivissāti kiṃ abhinivisitvā, paccayaṃ katvāti attho. Tatiyādīsu diṭṭhītiādīni puggalajjhāsayena vuttāni. Paṭhamādīni.
第10经《阿难经》的注释巴利
10. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
159 第十经中,“前往”是指:他看见其他比丘请人讲解以五蕴为所缘的业处,精勤努力,证得阿罗汉果后,在世尊面前记说自己所证得的果位,于是心想:“我也要请人讲解以五蕴为所缘的业处,精勤努力,证得阿罗汉果后,记说自己所证得的果位。”这样想过之后,他就前去拜见世尊。不过,世尊在世时,虽然并没有看到这位长老断除上三道所应断的烦恼,但为了“我要把握这个人的心”而为他说法。对他来说,只要作意一两次,因为侍奉佛陀的时间到了,就必须前往。因此,能令他的心欢喜、使解脱成熟的法,正是这种业处的修习。第十。巴利
159. Dasame upasaṅkamīti aññe bhikkhū pañcakkhandhakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā yuñjitvā ghaṭetvā arahattaṃ patvā satthu santike aññaṃ byākaronte disvā ‘‘ahampi pañcakkhandhakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā yuñjanto ghaṭento, arahattaṃ patvā aññaṃ byākarissāmī’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkami. Satthā pana attano dharamānakāle therassa uparimaggattayavajjhānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānaṃ apassantopi ‘‘imassa cittaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti kathesi. Tassāpi ekaṃ dve vāre manasi katvāva buddhupaṭṭhānavelā jātāti gantabbaṃ hoti. Itissa cittaṃ sampahaṃsamāno vimuttiparipācanīyadhammova so kammaṭṭhānānuyogo jātoti. Dasamaṃ.